Language L
Display

With Kūṭadanta

Kūṭadantasutta

1.01. The Brahmins and Householders of Khāṇumata

1.1So I have heard. When asked about sacrifice, the Buddha tells a story of how a king was persuaded to forgo cruelty and institute a constructive social policy of welfare instead. 1.2At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Magadhans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Magadhan brahmins named Khāṇumata. Khāṇumata is only mentioned here. It means “stumpy”, perhaps indicating that it was, or had recently been, a rough out-of-the-way place. 1.3There he stayed nearby at Ambalaṭṭhikā. The commentary says this was similar to the Ambalaṭṭhikā of DN 1:1.2.1.

1.4Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta was living in Khāṇumata. It was a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. Like the town Khāṇumata, the brahmin Kūṭadanta appears only here. His name means “pointy teeth”, but there is no evidence that he was a vampire. 1.5Now at that time Kūṭadanta had prepared a great sacrifice. 1.6Bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats and rams—seven hundred of each—had been led to the post for the sacrifice. At Snp 2.7:26.1, the sacrifice of cows in particular was said to be the nadir of decline for brahmins. When similar sacrifices are described elsewhere in the canon, the number is five hundred rather than seven hundred (SN 3.9:1.2, AN 7.47:1.2).

2.1The brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata heard:

2.2“It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 2.3He has this good reputation: 2.4‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ 2.5He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. 2.6He proclaims a teaching that is good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. 2.7It’s good to see such perfected ones.”

2.8Then, exiting Khāṇumata, they formed into companies and headed to Ambalaṭṭhikā.

3.1Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. 3.2He saw the brahmins and householders heading for Ambalaṭṭhikā, 3.3and addressed his butler, 3.4“My butler, why are the brahmins and householders headed for Ambalaṭṭhikā?”

3.5“The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 3.6He has this good reputation: 3.7‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ 3.8They’re going to see that worthy Gotama.”

4.1Then Kūṭadanta thought, 4.2“I’ve heard that 4.3the ascetic Gotama knows how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. News of the Buddha had spread in Brahmanical circles. In DN 3 we saw the Buddha use his rhetorical technique of adapting his teaching to reframe Brahmanical doctrines in order to establish a common ground. Here we see the downside to such techniques, as the details of the reframing have been lost. 4.4I don’t know about that, 4.5but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 4.6Why don’t I ask him how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories?” No such sacrifice has been identified in Brahmanical texts.

4.7Then Kūṭadanta addressed his butler, 4.8“Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: 4.9‘Sirs, the brahmin Kūṭadanta asks 4.10you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Gotama.’”

4.11“Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked. 4.12[…]4.13[…]

5.02. The Qualities of Kūṭadanta

5.1Now at that time several hundred brahmins were residing in Khāṇumata 5.2thinking to participate in Kūṭadanta’s sacrifice. 5.3They heard that 5.4Kūṭadanta was going to see the ascetic Gotama. 5.5They approached Kūṭadanta and said to him:

5.6“Is it really true that you are going to see the ascetic Gotama?”

5.7“Yes, gentlemen, it is true.” 5.8[…]

6.1“Please don’t! 6.2It’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama. 6.3For if you do so, your reputation will diminish and his will increase. 6.4For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.5it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.

6.6You are well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 6.7For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.8it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.

6.9You’re rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of property and assets, and lots of money and grain …

6.10You recite and remember the hymns, and have mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. You know them word-by-word, and their grammar. You are well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. …

6.11You are attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. You have divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …

6.12You are ethical, mature in ethical conduct. …

6.13You’re a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …

6.14You teach the tutors of many, and teach three hundred young students to recite the hymns. Many students come from various districts and countries for the sake of the hymns, wishing to learn the hymns. …

6.15You’re old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life. 6.16The ascetic Gotama is young, and has newly gone forth. …

6.17You’re honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …

6.18and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. …

6.19You live in Khāṇumata, a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. 6.20For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.21it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.”

7.03. The Qualities of the Buddha

7.1When they had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to those brahmins:

7.2“Well then, gentlemen, listen to why it’s appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama, 7.3and it’s not appropriate for him to come to see me. 7.4He is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 7.5For this reason it’s not appropriate for the ascetic Gotama to come to see me; 7.6rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him.

7.7When he went forth he abandoned a large family circle. …

7.8When he went forth he abandoned abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. …

7.9He went forth from the lay life to homelessness while still a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. …

7.10Though his mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces, he shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. …

7.11He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …

7.12He is ethical, possessing ethical conduct that is noble and skillful. …

7.13He’s a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …

7.14He’s a tutor of tutors. …

7.15He has ended sensual desire, and is rid of caprice. …

7.16He teaches the efficacy of deeds and action. He doesn’t wish any harm upon the community of brahmins. …

7.17He went forth from an eminent family of unbroken aristocratic lineage. …

7.18He went forth from a rich, affluent, and wealthy family. …

7.19People come from distant lands and distant countries to question him. …

7.20Many thousands of deities have gone for refuge for life to him. …

7.21He has this good reputation: 7.22‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ …

7.23He has the thirty-two marks of a great man. …

7.24He is welcoming, congenial, polite, smiling, open, the first to speak. …

7.25He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by the four assemblies. …

7.26Many gods and humans are devoted to him. …

7.27While he is residing in a village or town, non-human entities do not harass them. …

7.28He leads an order and a community, and tutors a community, and is said to be the best of the various religious founders. He didn’t come by his fame in the same ways as those other ascetics and brahmins. 7.29Rather, he came by his fame due to his supreme knowledge and conduct. …

7.30King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …

7.31King Pasenadi of Kosala and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …

7.32The brahmin Pokkharasāti and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …

7.33He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …

7.34King Pasenadi of Kosala …

7.35and the brahmin Pokkharasāti.

7.36The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 7.37Any ascetic or brahmin who comes to stay in our village district is our guest, 7.38and should be honored and respected as such. 7.39[…]7.40[…]7.41For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for the worthy Gotama to come to see me, 7.42rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. 7.43This is the extent of the worthy Gotama’s praise that I have memorized. But his praises are not confined to this, 7.44for the praise of the worthy Gotama is limitless.”

7.45When he had spoken, those brahmins said to him, 7.46“According to Kūṭadanta’s praises, if the worthy Gotama were staying within a hundred leagues, it’d be worthwhile for a faithful gentleman to go to see him, even if he had to carry his own provisions in a knapsack.”

7.47“Well then, gentlemen, let’s all go to see the ascetic Gotama.”

8.04. The Story of King Mahāvijita’s Sacrifice

8.1Then Kūṭadanta together with a large group of brahmins went to see the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. 8.2When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. 8.3Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their joined palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.

9.1Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, 9.2“Worthy Gotama, I’ve heard that 9.3you know how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. 9.4I don’t know about that, 9.5but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 9.6Please teach me how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories.”

9.7“Well then, brahmin, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.” Kūṭadanta’s proposal that the Buddha advise him on the sacrifice of 700 animals is outrageous. Nonetheless, the Buddha responds politely since Kūṭadanta is being polite. While it is tempting to see the sacrifice of animals by supposedly virtuous priests as sheer hypocrisy, the fact of sacrifice remains one of the most widespread and mysterious of human religious practices. In an empathetic work that addresses this squarely, Roberto Calasso’s Ardor sees the vast complex of Vedic ritual and theory as making plain the fact of killing so that the guilt may be contained, in contrast with our modern culture of killing on an industrial scale while hiding it out of sight.

9.8“Yes, worthy sir,” Kūṭadanta replied. 9.9The Buddha said this: 10.1“Once upon a time, brahmin, there was a king named Mahāvijita. He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses. Mahāvijita means “Great Dominion”. He seems to be only known from this story. The idiom bhūtapubbaṁ (literally “so it was in the past”) introduces legendary narratives of usually dubious historicity, like the English idiom “once upon a time”. 10.2Then as King Mahāvijita was in private retreat this thought came to his mind: In the Pali, meaningful thoughts often occur to people when withdrawn in seclusion. This doesn’t necessary mean they were in formal meditation. 10.3‘I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I hold a large sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’ The great sacrifices, especially the horse sacrifice, ensured royal authority. Their very scale and wastefulness showed off the wealth of the king.

10.4Then he summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: “High priest” is purohita. He was a family chaplain advising and consecrating the royal family. The closeness of the relationship is shown by the fact that the royal family would take the lineage name of the purohita. 10.5‘Just now, brahmin, as I was in private retreat this thought came to mind, 10.6“I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I perform a great sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.” 10.7Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 10.8Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’

11.1When he had spoken, the brahmin high priest said to him: 11.2‘Sir, the king’s realm is harried and oppressed. Raiding of villages, towns, and cities has been seen, and infesting of highways. Then, as today, government policy was driven by the perception of rising crime rate. This whole passage is one of the Buddha’s most important statements on public policy. It is expressed through storytelling, giving a good example of how myths were invoked—and subverted—as rationales for current policy. 11.3But if the king were to extract more taxes while his realm is thus harried and oppressed, he would not be doing his duty. “Taxes” is bali. He would have had to press his people for the extra funds to hold the sacrifice.

11.4Now the king might think, 11.5“I’ll eradicate this plague of savages by execution or imprisonment or confiscation or condemnation or banishment!” But that’s not the right way to eradicate this plague of savages. “Plague of savages” (dassukhīla) is the only occurrence of Sanskrit dasyu in early Pali. The dasyu were inveterate foes of the Aryans in the Vedic period. Bereft of civilizing rites, scriptures, and observances, they were no children of Manu (Rig Veda 10.22.8). Their wiles (māyā) made them a potent threat (Rig Veda 4.16.9, 8.14.14, 10.73.5). Indra was invoked to ensure their destruction (Rig Veda passim; Atharva Veda 2.14.5, 4.32.3, 20.21.4, 20.37.5, 20.42.2). Legend has it that Agni and Soma first supported the dasyu before being won over by Indra (Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa 1.6.3.13; see also 6.4.2.4). By the time of the Buddha the dasyu have vanished except as a legendary foe of the past. Where the Brahmanical texts advocate the pitiless destruction of the dasyu, the brahmin high priest in the Buddhist text advocates an inclusive policy of social welfare. 11.6Those who remain after the killing will return to harass the king’s realm. The priest knows that the king will respond better to a pragmatic argument than a moral one.

11.7Rather, here is a plan, relying on which the plague of savages will be properly uprooted. Effective social policy requires a forward-thinking plan, not just reacting to grievances. 11.8So let the king provide seed and fodder for those in the realm who work in growing crops and raising cattle. The king should spend his own resources to support his citizens in the various occupations. 11.9Let the king provide funding for those who work in trade. 11.10Let the king guarantee food and wages for those in government service. 11.11Then the people, occupied with their own work, will not harass the realm. Here the priest identifies a fundamental cause of social unrest and disorder. 11.12The king’s revenues will be great. The king spends out of pocket, but the economy flourishes, so tax revenues increase even though he has not raised taxes. This is the essence of Keynesian economic theory. 11.13When the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, will dwell as if their houses were wide open.’ Khema means a place of safety and sanctuary, where both humans and animals have no fear.

11.14The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation. A good leader listens to advice. 11.15[…]11.16[…]11.17[…]11.18[…]

11.19Then the king summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: 11.20‘I have eradicated the plague of savages. And relying on your plan my revenue is now great. 11.21Since the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, dwell as if their houses were wide open. 11.22Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 11.23Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’

12.04.1. The Four Accessories

12.1‘In that case, let the king announce this throughout the realm to the aristocrat vassals of both town and country; the ministers and councillors of both town and country; the well-to-do brahmins of both town and country; and the well-off householders of both town and country. Here the phrase “of both town and country” qualifies each group. At AN 4.70:1.3, however, “brahmins and householders” and “people of town and country” are separate groups of people. Elsewhere the context does not always decide between these two possibilities. Generally the idiom aims at inclusivity, as opposed to here where the king is consulting the rich and powerful, so I treat them as two separate groups, thus including the common folk. 12.2“I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please grant your approval, good fellows; it will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.”

12.3The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation. 12.4And all of the people who were thus informed responded by saying: 12.5‘May the king perform a sacrifice! It is time for a sacrifice, great king.’ 12.6[…]12.7[…]12.8[…]12.9And so these four consenting factions became accessories to the sacrifice. “Consenting factions” is anumatipakkhā. The king governs with the consent of his people, although only the landowning classes are considered.

13.04.2. The Eight Accessories

13.1King Mahāvijita possessed eight factors. Royal authority is not based just on birth, conquest, ritual, or power, but on quality of character.

13.2He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation.

13.3He was attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He had divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold.

13.4He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses.

13.5He was powerful, having an army of four divisions that was obedient and carried out instructions. He’d probably prevail over his enemies just with his reputation. Read sahati (“prevails”) over the several variants.

13.6He was faithful, generous, a donor, his door always open. He was a well-spring of support, making merit with ascetics and brahmins, for paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars.

13.7He was very learned in diverse fields of learning. He understood the meaning of diverse statements, saying: Showing the importance of comprehension over blind adherence to tradition. 13.8‘This is what that statement means; that is what this statement means.’

13.9He was astute, competent, and intelligent, able to think issues through as they bear upon the past, future, and present. Meditators focus on the present, but that does not mean they cannot think about the past or future; it just means they are not trapped in useless thoughts.

13.10These are the eight factors that King Mahāvijita possessed. 13.11And so these eight factors also became accessories to the sacrifice.

14.04.3. Four More Accessories

14.1And the brahmin high priest had four factors. These are four of the five qualities that Soṇadaṇḍa identifies as the qualities of a brahmin at DN 4:13.2. Missing is appearance, which is the first factor that Soṇadaṇḍa admits is unnecessary.

14.2He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation.

14.3He recited and remembered the hymns, and had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man.

14.4He was ethical, mature in ethical conduct.

14.5He was astute and clever, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle.

14.6These are the four factors that the brahmin high priest possessed. 14.7And so these four factors also became accessories to the sacrifice.

15.04.4. The Three Modes

15.1Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest taught the three modes to the king. 15.2‘Now, though the king wants to perform a great sacrifice, he might have certain regrets, thinking: 15.3“I shall lose a great fortune,” or Compare the three factors of a donor’s mind-state at AN 6.37:2.4. 15.4[…]15.5“I am losing a great fortune,” or 15.6[…]15.7“I have lost a great fortune.” But the king should not harbor such regrets.’

15.8These are the three modes that the brahmin high priest taught to the king before the sacrifice.

16.04.5. The Ten Respects

16.1Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients in ten respects: What a recipient does with a gift is beyond the donor’s control.

16.2‘There will come to the sacrifice those who kill living creatures and those who refrain from killing living creatures. 16.3As to those who kill living creatures, the outcome of that is theirs alone. 16.4But as to those who refrain from killing living creatures, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart. PTS edition acknowledges sajjata only as a variant reading, but it is in the commentary, so should be accepted in the text. It is from √sajj (relinquish).

16.5There will come to the sacrifice those who steal … 16.6commit sexual misconduct … 16.7lie … 16.8use backbiting … 16.9use harsh speech … 16.10talk nonsense … 16.11are covetous … 16.12have ill will … 16.13have wrong view and those who have right view. 16.14As to those who have wrong view, the outcome of that is theirs alone. 16.15But as to those who have right view, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’

16.16These are the ten respects in which the high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients before the sacrifice.

17.04.6. The Sixteen Respects

17.1Next, while the king was performing the great sacrifice, the brahmin high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind in sixteen respects:

17.2‘Now, while the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, 17.3“King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. Another lesson in leadership: the importance of communication. 17.4That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” 17.5Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.6For the king did indeed announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. 17.7Let the king know this as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.

17.8While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, 17.9“King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals; the ministers and councillors; the well-to-do brahmins; and the well-off householders. That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” 17.10Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.11For the king did indeed announce it to all these people. Due to abbreviation, the text only mentions householders here, but clearly all are intended. 17.12Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.

17.13While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say 17.14that he does not possess the eight factors. 17.15[…]17.16[…]17.17[…]17.18[…]17.19[…]17.20[…]17.21[…]17.22[…]17.23[…]17.24[…]17.25[…]17.26[…]17.27Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.28For the king does indeed possess the eight factors. 17.29Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.

17.30While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say 17.31that the high priest does not possess the four factors. 17.32[…]17.33[…]17.34[…]17.35[…]17.36[…]17.37[…]17.38[…]17.39[…]17.40[…]17.41[…]17.42Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.43For the high priest does indeed possess the four factors. 17.44Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’

17.45These are the sixteen respects in which the high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind while he was performing the sacrifice.

18.1And brahmin, in that sacrifice no cattle were killed, no goats or sheep were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. 18.2No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. 18.3Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. A leader gets results through inspiration, not fear. 18.4They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. 18.5The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses. These were regarded as valuable yet harmless products.

19.1Then the aristocrat vassals, ministers and councillors, well-to-do brahmins, and well-off householders came to the king bringing abundant wealth and said, 19.2‘Sire, this abundant wealth is specially for you alone; may Your Highness accept it!’ The king’s generosity and sincerity brings out the best in the others.

19.3‘There’s enough raised for me through regular taxes. Let this be for you; and here, take even more!’ 19.4[…]

19.5When the king turned them down, they withdrew to one side to think up a plan, 19.6‘It wouldn’t be proper for us to take this abundant wealth back to our own homes. 19.7King Mahāvijita is performing a great sacrifice. Let us make an offering as an auxiliary sacrifice.’

20.1Then the aristocrat vassals of town and country set up gifts to the east of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.2The ministers and councillors of town and country set up gifts to the south of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.3The well-to-do brahmins of town and country set up gifts to the west of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.4The well-off householders of town and country set up gifts to the north of the sacrificial enclosure.

20.5And brahmin, in that sacrifice too no cattle were killed, no goats were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. 20.6No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. 20.7Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. 20.8They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. 20.9The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses.

20.10And so there were four consenting factions, eight factors possessed by King Mahāvijita, four factors possessed by the high priest, 20.11and three modes. 20.12Brahmin, this is called the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.”

21.1When he said this, those brahmins made an uproar, Here ends the Buddha’s legendary account of the past. 21.2“Hooray for such sacrifice! Hooray for the accomplishment of such sacrifice!”

21.3But the brahmin Kūṭadanta sat in silence. The other brahmins are satisfied, but Kūṭadanta senses there is more to it. 21.4So those brahmins said to him, 21.5“How can you not applaud the ascetic Gotama’s fine words?”

21.6“It’s not that I don’t applaud what he said. 21.7If anyone didn’t applaud such fine words, their head would explode!

21.8But, gentlemen, it occurs to me that 21.9the ascetic Gotama does not say: 21.10‘So I have heard’ or ‘It ought to be like this.’ “So I have heard” (evaṁ me sutaṁ) is the standard opening for Buddhist suttas. This tag was used to indicate that the speaker was not present at the events, but “heard” about them. This is in contrast with the phrase “I heard and learned this in the presence” (sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ), which is used when reporting a teaching heard directly from the Buddha, eg. SN 55.52:5.1, SN 22.90:9.1, MN 47:10.7, etc. 21.11Rather, he just says: 21.12‘So it was then, this is how it was then.’

21.13It occurs to me that 21.14the ascetic Gotama at that time must have been King Mahāvijita, the owner of the sacrifice, or else the brahmin high priest who facilitated the sacrifice for him.

21.15Does the worthy Gotama recall having performed such a sacrifice, or having facilitated it, and then, when his body broke up, after death, being reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm?”

21.16“I do recall that, brahmin. For I myself was the brahmin high priest at that time who facilitated the sacrifice.” This qualifies the story of Mahāvijita as an early canonical Jātaka. There are a small number of such stories in the early suttas, only some of which overlap with the later Jātaka collections, the story of Mahāvijita not being among them.

22.05. A Regular Gift as an Propitious Sacrifice.

22.1“But Mister Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” Kūṭadanta is hoping for a better return on his investment. Throughout the suttas, we find a strain of what might be called “spiritual economics”.

22.2“There is, brahmin.”

22.3“But what is it?”

22.4“The regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; The anukula (“propitious”) sacrifice is mentioned several times (eg. DN 5:22.4, AN 4.40:2.2). The Pali commentaries interpret it as “in line with (anu-) family (kula)”. But nothing in the contexts connects it with family customs, nor is such a term known in Sanskrit. It seems rather to be a misunderstanding of Sanskrit anukūla, literally “along the riverbank”, and in applied use, “in conformity with”, “favorable to”, as in the favor of the gods. This is the standard reading in Buddhist Sanskrit. Such a sacrifice is characterized, not by family custom, but by harmlessness. Thus anukula means “propitious, favored (by the gods and the Dhamma)”. 22.5this sacrifice, brahmin, has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.”

23.1“What is the cause, Mister Gotama, what is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories?”

23.2“Because neither perfected ones nor those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. 23.3Why is that? 23.4Because beatings and throttlings are seen there. This contradicts the description given above.

23.5But the regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; 23.6perfected ones and those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. 23.7Why is that? 23.8Because no beatings and throttlings are seen there.

23.9This is the cause, brahmin, this is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.”

24.1“But Mister Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories and those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”

24.2“There is, brahmin.”

24.3“But what is it?”

24.4“When someone gives a dwelling specially for the Saṅgha of the four quarters.” This means that the dwelling could be used by any Saṅgha member, as opposed to being given to a particular monastic or group. The gift of a dwelling is regarded as the best kind of offering to the Saṅgha.

25.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”

25.2[…]

25.3[…]

25.4“When someone with confident heart goes for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha.” 25.5[…]

26.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”

26.2[…]

26.3[…]

26.4“When someone with a confident heart undertakes the training rules 26.5to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and beer, wine, and liquor intoxicants.” Thus far the Buddha has described the regular practice of a Buddhist lay person. 26.6[…]

27.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”

27.2“There is, brahmin.

27.3[…]

27.4“It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. This is the start of the teaching on the Gradual Training, encompassing ethics (sīla), meditation (samādhi), and wisdom (paññā). Only the ethics portion appeared in the Brahmajālasutta, while all three are restated in all the remaining suttas of this chapter, although in truncated form. | It is exceedingly rare for a Buddha to appear. 27.4.1.2He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. The Buddha realizes the truth by his own understanding, not through divine intervention or other metaphysical means. 27.4.1.3He proclaims a teaching that is good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It is good when first heard, when practicing, and when one has realized the fruits.

27.4.2.1A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. The word “householder” (gahapati) informally refers to any lay person, but more specifically indicates someone who owns a house, i.e. a person of standing. The renunciate life is not just for slaves or workers wishing to escape their station. 27.4.2.2They gain faith in the Realized One 27.4.2.3and reflect: 27.4.2.4‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. 27.4.2.5It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. 27.4.2.6Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’

27.4.2.7After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.

27.4.3.1Once they’ve gone forth, they live restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. They act skillfully by body and speech. They’re purified in livelihood and accomplished in ethical conduct. They guard the sense doors, have mindfulness and situational awareness, and are content. This serves as a table of contents for the teachings to come. | Nowadays, the “monastic code” (pātimokkha) means the list of rules for monks and nuns found in the Vinayapiṭaka. In the early texts, however, it has three main meanings. Sometimes it does refer to the list of rules, as at AN 10.36:1.6. Here it refers to the code of conduct that follows, which is a non-legalistic set of guidelines that preceded the Vinayapiṭaka. At DN 14:3.28.1 it refers to the verses summarizing monastic conduct known as the “Ovāda Pātimokkha”.

27.4.4.0.15.1. Ethics

27.4.4.0.25.1.1. The Shorter Section on Ethics

27.4.4.1And how, brahmin, is a mendicant accomplished in ethics? 27.4.4.2It’s when a mendicant gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. While the precept includes any living creature, if a monastic murders a human being they are immediately and permanently expelled. 27.4.4.3This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.4.4They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving. To steal anything of substantial value is an expulsion offence. 27.4.4.5This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.4.6They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, avoiding the vulgar act of sex. Buddhist monastics are forbidden from any form of sexual activity. To engage in penetrative intercourse is an expulsion offence. 27.4.4.7This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.5.1They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words. While any form of lying is forbidden, if a monastic falsely claims states of enlightenment or deep meditation they are expelled. 27.4.5.2This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.5.3They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. 27.4.5.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.5.5They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, lovely, going to the heart, polite, likable and agreeable to the people. 27.4.5.6This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.5.7They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. 27.4.5.8This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.6.1They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. 27.4.6.2They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. 27.4.6.3They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music . 27.4.6.4They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. 27.4.6.5They refrain from high and luxurious beds. To avoid sleeping too much. 27.4.6.6They refrain from receiving gold and currency, 27.4.6.7raw grains, 27.4.6.8raw meat, 27.4.6.9women and girls, 27.4.6.10male and female bondservants, 27.4.6.11goats and sheep, 27.4.6.12chickens and pigs, 27.4.6.13elephants, cows, horses, and mares, 27.4.6.14and fields and land. 27.4.6.15They refrain from running errands and messages; 27.4.6.16buying and selling; 27.4.6.17falsifying weights, metals, or measures; 27.4.6.18bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; 27.4.6.19mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence. 27.4.6.20This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.6.21The shorter section on ethics is finished.

27.4.7.05.1.2. The Middle Section on Ethics

27.4.7.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in injuring plants and seeds. 27.4.7.2These include plants propagated from roots, stems, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. They refrain from such injury to plants and seeds. 27.4.7.3This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.8.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in storing up goods for their own use. 27.4.8.2This includes such things as food, drink, clothes, vehicles, bedding, fragrance, and things of the flesh. 27.4.8.3They refrain from storing up such goods. 27.4.8.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.9.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in seeing shows. 27.4.9.2This includes such things as dancing, singing, music, performances, and storytelling; clapping, gongs, and kettledrums; beauty pageants; pole-acrobatics and bone-washing displays of the corpse-workers; battles of elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, goats, rams, chickens, and quails; staff-fights, boxing, and wrestling; combat, roll calls of the armed forces, battle-formations, and regimental reviews. 27.4.9.3They refrain from such shows. 27.4.9.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.10.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in gambling that causes negligence. 27.4.10.2This includes such things as checkers with eight or ten rows, checkers in the air, hopscotch, spillikins, board-games, tip-cat, drawing straws, dice, leaf-flutes, toy plows, somersaults, pinwheels, toy measures, toy carts, toy bows, guessing words from syllables, guessing another’s thoughts, and imitating musical instruments. 27.4.10.3They refrain from such gambling. 27.4.10.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.11.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still make use of high and luxurious bedding. 27.4.11.2This includes such things as sofas, couches, woolen covers—shag-piled, colorful, white, embroidered with flowers, quilted, embroidered with animals, double-or single-fringed—and silk covers studded with gems, as well as silken sheets, woven carpets, rugs for elephants, horses, or chariots, antelope hide rugs, and spreads of fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red cushions at both ends. 27.4.11.3They refrain from such bedding. 27.4.11.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.12.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. 27.4.12.2This includes such things as applying beauty products by anointing, massaging, bathing, and rubbing; mirrors, ointments, garlands, fragrances, and makeup; face-powder, foundation, bracelets, headbands, fancy walking-sticks or containers, rapiers, parasols, fancy sandals, turbans, jewelry, chowries, and long-fringed white robes. 27.4.12.3They refrain from such attirement and adornment. 27.4.12.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.13.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in low talk. 27.4.13.2This includes such topics as talk about kings, bandits, and ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; street talk and well talk; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place. 27.4.13.3They refrain from such low talk. 27.4.13.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.14.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in arguments. 27.4.14.2They say such things as: ‘You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!’ 27.4.14.3They refrain from such argumentative talk. 27.4.14.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.15.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in running errands and messages. 27.4.15.2This includes running errands for rulers, ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or princes who say: ‘Go here, go there. Take this, bring that from there.’ 27.4.15.3They refrain from such errands. 27.4.15.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.16.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in fawning, flattery, hinting, and belittling, and using material things to chase after other material things. They refrain from such fraud and flattery. 27.4.16.2This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.16.3The middle section on ethics is finished.

27.4.17.05.1.3. The Long Section on Ethics

27.4.17.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.17.2This includes such fields as augury, omenology, divining portents, interpreting dreams, divining features of men and women, divining holes in cloth gnawed by mice, fire offerings, ladle offerings, offerings of husks, rice powder, rice, ghee, or oil; offerings from the mouth, blood sacrifices, limb-reading; geomancy for building sites, fields, and cemeteries; exorcisms, earth magic, snake charming, poisons; the lore of the scorpion, the rat, the bird, and the crow; prophesying life span, chanting for protection, and divining omens from wild animals. 27.4.17.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.17.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.18.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.18.2This includes reading the marks of gems, cloth, clubs, swords, spears, arrows, bows, weapons, women, men, boys, girls, male and female bondservants, elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, cows, goats, rams, chickens, quails, monitor lizards, rabbits, tortoises, or deer. 27.4.18.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.18.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.19.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.19.2This includes making predictions that the king will march forth or march back; or that our king will attack and the enemy king will retreat, or vice versa; or that our king will triumph and the enemy king will be defeated, or vice versa; and so there will be victory for one and defeat for the other. 27.4.19.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.19.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.20.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.20.2This includes making predictions that there will be an eclipse of the moon, or sun, or stars; that the sun, moon, and stars will be in conjunction or in opposition; that there will be a meteor shower, a fiery horizon, an earthquake, or thunder in the heavens; that there will be a rising, a setting, a darkening, a brightening of the moon, sun, and stars. And it also includes making predictions about the results of all such phenomena. 27.4.20.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.20.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.21.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.21.2This includes predicting whether there will be plenty of rain or drought; plenty to eat or famine; an abundant harvest or a bad harvest; security or peril; sickness or health. It also includes such occupations as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, poetry, and cosmology. 27.4.21.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.21.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.22.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.22.2This includes making arrangements for giving and taking in marriage; for engagement and divorce; and for scattering rice inwards or outwards at the wedding ceremony. It also includes casting spells for good or bad luck, treating impacted fetuses, binding the tongue, or locking the jaws; charms for the hands and ears; questioning a mirror, a girl, or a god as an oracle; worshiping the sun, worshiping the Great One, breathing fire, and invoking Siri, the goddess of luck. 27.4.22.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.22.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.23.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.23.2This includes rites for propitiation, for granting wishes, for ghosts, for the earth, for rain, for property settlement, and for preparing and consecrating house sites, and rites involving sipping water and bathing, and oblations. It also includes administering emetics, purgatives, expectorants, and phlegmagogues; administering ear-oils, eye restoratives, nasal medicine, ointments, and counter-ointments; surgery with needle and scalpel, treating children, prescribing root medicines, and herbal bandages. 27.4.23.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.23.4This pertains to their ethics.

27.4.24.1A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. 27.4.24.2It’s like a king who has defeated his enemies. He sees no danger from his foes in any quarter. 27.4.24.3In the same way, a mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. 27.4.24.4When they have this entire spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves. This is the first step in the Buddha’s answer to Ajātasattu. This is the sense of happiness and well-being that you have when you know you have done nothing wrong for which anyone might blame you. It is the psychological foundation for meditation. 27.5That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics.

27.5.1.6The longer section on ethics is finished.

27.5.2.0.15.2. Immersion

27.5.2.0.25.2.1. Sense Restraint

27.5.2.1And how does a mendicant guard the sense doors? Here begins the series of practices that build on moral fundamentals to lay the groundwork for meditation. 27.5.2.2When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. 27.5.2.3If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. It is not that one cannot see things, but that, mindful of its effect, one avoids unnecessary stimulation. | “Covetousness and bitterness” (abhijjhā domanassā) are the strong forms of desire and aversion caused by lack of restraint. 27.5.2.4When they hear a sound with their ears … 27.5.2.5When they smell an odor with their nose … 27.5.2.6When they taste a flavor with their tongue … 27.5.2.7When they feel a touch with their body … 27.5.2.8When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. 27.5.2.9If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. 27.5.2.10When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves. Their happiness deepens, as they see that not only their actions but also their mind is becoming free of anything unwholesome. 27.5.2.11That’s how a mendicant guards the sense doors.

27.5.3.05.2.2. Mindfulness and Situational Awareness

27.5.3.1And how does a mendicant have mindfulness and situational awareness? Situational awareness is a psychological term popularized in the 1990s. It has to do with the perception of environmental phenomena and the comprehension of their meaning, which is very close to the sense of the Pali term sampajañña. 27.5.3.2It’s when a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. These acts describe the daily life of a mendicant: going into the village for alms, at which time there are many distracting sights. Then they return, eat their meal, and spend their day in meditation. 27.5.3.3That’s how a mendicant has mindfulness and situational awareness.

27.5.4.05.2.3. Contentment

27.5.4.1And how is a mendicant content? 27.5.4.2It’s when a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. A Buddhist monk has three robes: a lower robe (sabong or sarong), an upper robe, and an outer cloak. 27.5.4.3They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. 27.5.4.4In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. 27.5.4.5That’s how a mendicant is content.

27.5.5.05.2.4. Giving Up the Hindrances

27.5.5.1When they have this entire spectrum of noble ethics, this noble sense restraint, this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, and this noble contentment, These are the prerequisite conditions for embarking on deep meditation. 27.5.5.2they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. 27.5.5.3After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and establish mindfulness in their presence. For parimukha (“in their presence”) we find pratimukha in Sanskrit, which can mean “presence” or the reflection of the face. Late canonical Pali explains parimukha as “the tip of the nose or the reflection of the face (mukhanimitta)”. Parimukha in Sanskrit is rare, but it appears in Pāṇini 4.4.29, which the commentary illustrates with the example of a servant “in the presence” of their master (cp. SN 47.8). So it seems the sense is “before the face” or more generally “in the presence”. | To “establish mindfulness” (satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā) is literally to “do satipaṭṭhāna”.

27.5.6.1Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Covetousness (abhijjha) has been curbed by sense restraint, and now is fully abandoned. 27.5.6.2Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Likewise ill will (byāpādapadosa), which was called domanassa in the formula for sense restraint. 27.5.6.3Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. “Mindfulness and situational awareness” has a prominent role in abandoning dullness. 27.5.6.4Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind peaceful inside, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Restlessness hankers for the future and is countered by contentment. Remorse digs up the past and is countered by ethical purity. 27.5.6.5Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt. The meditator set out on their path after gaining faith in the Buddha.

27.5.7.1Suppose a man who has gotten into debt were to apply himself to work, The happiness of meditation is hard to understand without practicing, so the Buddha gives a series of five similes to illustrate in terms Ajātasattu would understand. 27.5.7.2and his efforts proved successful. 27.5.7.3He would pay off the original loan and have enough left over to support his partner. 27.5.7.4Thinking about this, 27.5.7.5[…]27.5.7.6[…]27.5.7.7[…]27.5.7.8he’d be filled with joy and happiness.

27.5.8.1Suppose there was a person who was sick, suffering, gravely ill. They’d lose their appetite and get physically weak. 27.5.8.2But after some time they’d recover from that illness, and regain their appetite and their strength. 27.5.8.3Thinking about this, 27.5.8.4[…]27.5.8.5[…]27.5.8.6[…]27.5.8.7[…]27.5.8.8they’d be filled with joy and happiness.

27.5.9.1Suppose a person was imprisoned in a jail. 27.5.9.2But after some time they were released from jail, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. 27.5.9.3Thinking about this, 27.5.9.4[…]27.5.9.5[…]27.5.9.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness.

27.5.10.1Suppose a person was a bondservant. They would not be their own master, but indentured to another, unable to go where they wish. 27.5.10.2But after some time they’d be freed from servitude. They would be their own master, not indentured to another, a freeman able to go where they wish. 27.5.10.3Thinking about this, 27.5.10.4[…]27.5.10.5[…]27.5.10.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness.

27.5.11.1Suppose there was a person with wealth and property who was traveling along a desert road, which was perilous, with nothing to eat. 27.5.11.2But after some time they crossed over the desert safely, arriving within a village, a sanctuary free of peril. 27.5.11.3Thinking about this, 27.5.11.4[…]27.5.11.5[…]27.5.11.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness.

27.5.12.1In the same way, as long as these five hindrances are not given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards them thus as a debt, a disease, a prison, slavery, and a desert crossing. The five hindrances remain a pillar of meditation teaching. The root sense means to “obstruct” but also to “obscure, darken, veil”.

27.5.12.2But when these five hindrances are given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards this as freedom from debt, good health, release from prison, emancipation, and a place of sanctuary at last. Each simile illustrates not the happiness of acquisition, but of letting go. 27.5.12.3[…]

27.5.12.4Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. The Buddha did not emphasize technical details of technique, but the emotional wholeness and joy that leads to deep meditation.

27.5.13.05.2.5. First Absorption

27.6Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Jhāna is a state of “elevated consciousness” (adhicitta), so all the terms have an elevated sense. | The plural form indicates that “sensual pleasures” includes sense experience, which the meditator can turn away from since they no longer have any desire for it. | The “unskillful qualities” are the five hindrances. | The “rapture and bliss born of seclusion” is the happiness of abandoning the hindrances and freedom from sense impingement. | “Placing the mind and keeping it connected” (vitakka, vicāra) uses terms that mean “thought” in coarse consciousness, but which in “elevated consciousness” refer to the subtle function of applying the mind to the meditation. 27.6.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. As a meditator proceeds, their subjective experience of the “body” evolves from tactile sense impressions (phoṭṭhabba), to the interior mental experience of bliss and light (manomayakāya), to the direct personal realization of highest truth (MN 70:23.2: kāyena ceva paramasaccaṁ sacchikaroti).

27.6.2.1It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out. The kneading is the “placing the mind and keeping it connected”, the water is bliss, while the lack of leaking speaks to the contained interiority of the experience. | Here as elsewhere, water is used as a metaphor for the mind in absorption. Compare Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad 4.3.32: “He becomes like water, one, the seer without duality; this is the world of Brahmā.” 27.6.2.2In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. 27.7This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.7.1.05.2.6. Second Absorption

27.8Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without applying the mind and keeping it connected. Each jhāna begins as the least refined aspect of the previous jhāna ends. This is not consciously directed, but describes the natural process of settling. The meditator is now fully confident and no longer needs to apply their mind: it is simply still and fully unified. 27.8.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion.

27.8.2.1It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. The simile emphasizes the water as bliss, while the lack of inflow expresses containment and unification. 27.8.2.2But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water. The water welling up is the rapture, which is the uplifting emotional response to the experience of bliss.

27.8.2.3In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. 27.8.2.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.8.3.05.2.7. Third Absorption

27.9Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, personally experiencing the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ The emotional response to bliss matures from the subtle thrill of rapture to the poise of equanimity. Mindfulness is present in all states of deep meditation, but with equanimity it becomes prominent. 27.9.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture.

27.9.2.1It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water. The meditator is utterly immersed in stillness and bliss. 27.9.2.2In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. 27.9.2.3This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.9.3.05.2.8. Fourth Absorption

27.10Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. The emotional poise of equanimity leads to the feeling of pleasure settling into the more subtle neutral feeling. Pain and sadness have been abandoned long before, but are emphasized here as they are subtle counterpart of pleasure. 27.10.1.2They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. The equanimity of the fourth jhāna is not dullness and indifference, but a brilliant and radiant awareness.

27.10.2.1It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth. The white cloth is the purity and brightness of equanimity. The commentary explains this as a person who has just got out of a bath and sits perfectly dry and content. 27.10.2.2In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. 27.11This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.11.1.0.15.3. The Eight Knowledges

27.11.1.0.25.3.1. Knowledge and Vision

27.12When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. Of the eight kinds of knowledge and vision, only the last is considered indispensable. The fourth jhāna is the ideal basis for developing higher knowledges, although elsewhere the canon shows that even the first jhāna can be a basis for liberating insight. Without jhāna, however, the eightfold path is incomplete and liberating insight is impossible. | The verb abhininnāmeti (“extend”) indicates that the meditator comes out of full immersion like a tortoise sticking out its limbs (SN 35.240:1.7). 27.12.1.2They understand: 27.12.1.3‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. This is the “coarse” (olārika) body. Note that its generation by mother and father contradicts the doctrine of Ajita Kesakambala. The obvious impermanence of the body invites the tempting but fallacious notion that the mind or soul is permanent, which is dispelled by deeper insight. 27.12.1.4And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’ This distinction should not be mistaken for mind-body dualism. These are not fundamental substances but experiences of a meditator.

27.12.2.1Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. 27.12.2.2And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. Strung gems were loved in India from the time in the Harappan civilization, millennia before the Buddha. 27.12.2.3And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and check it: 27.12.2.4‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. 27.12.2.5And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’

27.12.2.6In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. This form of “knowledge and vision” is rarely mentioned, being found only here, at DN 10:2.21.3, and at MN 77:29.2. The next realization, the “mind-made body” is also only found in these three suttas. | The Mahāsaṅgīti edition adds the spurious title vipassanāñāṇa (“insight knowledge”) to this section. This term does not appear anywhere in the Pali canon. 27.12.2.7[…]27.12.2.8[…]27.12.2.9[…]27.13This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.1.05.3.2. Mind-Made Body

27.13.1.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. The “mind-made body” is the interior mental representation of the physical body. In ordinary consciousness it is proprioception, which here is enhanced by the power of meditation. The higher powers in Buddhism are regarded as extensions and evolutions of aspects of ordinary experience, not as metaphysical realities separate from the world of mundane experience. 27.13.1.2From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. This is similar to the experience of the “astral body” described by modern spiritualists. Note that it is still “physical” (rūpī) even though it is mind-made. This is the subtle (sukhuma) body, which is an energetic experience of physical properties by the mind.

27.13.2.1Suppose a person was to draw a reed out from its sheath. 27.13.2.2They’d think: 27.13.2.3‘This is the reed, this is the sheath. The reed and the sheath are different things. The reed has been drawn out from the sheath.’ 27.13.2.4Or suppose a person was to draw a sword out from its scabbard. 27.13.2.5They’d think: 27.13.2.6‘This is the sword, this is the scabbard. The sword and the scabbard are different things. The sword has been drawn out from the scabbard.’ 27.13.2.7Or suppose a person was to draw a snake out from its slough. 27.13.2.8They’d think: 27.13.2.9‘This is the snake, this is the slough. The snake and the slough are different things. The snake has been drawn out from the slough.’

27.13.2.10In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. 27.13.2.11From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. 27.13.2.12This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.3.05.3.3. Psychic Powers

27.13.3.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. Here begin the “six direct knowledges” (chaḷabhiññā), which are found commonly throughout the early texts. | “Psychic powers” (iddhi) were much cultivated in the Buddha’s day, but the means to acquire them varied: devotion to a god, brutal penances, or magic rituals. The Buddha taught that the mind developed in samādhi was capable of things that are normally incomprehensible. 27.13.3.2They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity. Only a few of these are attested as events in the early texts. The most common is the ability to “materialize and dematerialize”, exhibited by the Buddha (AN 8.30:2.1), some disciples (MN 37:6.1), and deities (MN 67:8.1). The Pali is āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ, literally “manifest state, hidden state”. Also found in Chāndogya Upaniṣad 7.26.1.

27.13.4.1Suppose a deft potter or their apprentice had some well-prepared clay. They could produce any kind of pot that they like. These similes hark back to the descriptions of the purified mind as pliable and workable. 27.13.4.2Or suppose a deft ivory-carver or their apprentice had some well-prepared ivory. They could produce any kind of ivory item that they like. 27.13.4.3Or suppose a deft goldsmith or their apprentice had some well-prepared gold. They could produce any kind of gold item that they like. This simile is extended in detail at AN 3.101.

27.13.4.4In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. 27.13.4.5[…]27.13.4.6This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.5.05.3.4. Clairaudience

27.13.5.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. “Clairaudience” is a literal rendition of dibbasota. The root sense of dibba is to “shine” like the bright sky or a divine being. The senses of clarity and divinity are both present. 27.13.5.2With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. The Buddha occasionally used this ability for teaching, as at MN 75:6.1.

27.13.6.1Suppose there was a person traveling along the road. They’d hear the sound of drums, clay drums, horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms. They’d think: ‘That’s the sound of drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of clay drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms.’ The simile emphasizes the clarity and distinctness of the sounds. Compare AN 4.114: bheripaṇavasaṅkhatiṇavaninnādasaddānaṁ.

27.13.6.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. 27.13.6.3With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. 27.13.6.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.7.05.3.5. encompassing the minds of Others

27.13.7.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. Note that the Indic idiom is not the “reading” of minds, which suggests hearing the words spoken in inner dialogue. While this is exhibited by the Buddha (eg. AN 8.30:2.1), the main emphasis is on the comprehension of the overall state of mind. 27.13.7.2They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. 27.13.7.3They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, 27.13.7.4and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’. 27.13.7.5They understand mind with hate … 27.13.7.6mind without hate … 27.13.7.7mind with delusion … 27.13.7.8mind without delusion … 27.13.7.9constricted mind … 27.13.7.10scattered mind … 27.13.7.11expansive mind … 27.13.7.12unexpansive mind … 27.13.7.13mind that is not supreme … 27.13.7.14mind that is supreme … 27.13.7.15immersed mind … 27.13.7.16unimmersed mind … 27.13.7.17freed mind … 27.13.7.18They understand unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’.

27.13.8.1Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and they check their own reflection in a clean bright mirror or a clear bowl of water. If they had a spot they’d know ‘I have a spot,’ and if they had no spots they’d know ‘I have no spots.’ Again the simile emphasizes how clear and direct the experience is. Without deep meditation, we have some intuitive sense for the minds of others, but it is far from clear. 27.13.8.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. 27.13.8.3They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. 27.13.8.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.9.05.3.6. Recollection of Past Lives

27.13.9.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. Here begins the “three knowledges” (tevijjā), a subset of the six direct knowledges. The first two of these play an important role in deepening understanding of the nature of suffering in saṁsāra. While they are not necessary for those whose wisdom is keen, they are helpful. 27.13.9.2They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Empowered by the fourth jhāna, memory breaks through the veil of birth and death, revealing the vast expanse of time and dispelling the illusion that there is any place of eternal rest or sanctuary in the cycle of transmigration. The knowledge of these events is not hazy or murky, but clear and precise, illuminated by the brilliance of purified consciousness.

27.13.10.1Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’ The word for “past life” is pubbenivāsa, literally “former home”, and the imagery of houses is found in the second of the three knowledges as well. Recollection of past lives is as fresh and clear as the memory of a recent journey.

27.13.10.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. 27.13.10.3[…]27.13.10.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.11.05.3.7. Clairvoyance

27.13.11.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. 27.13.11.2With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Here knowledge extends to the rebirths of others as well as oneself. Even more significant, it brings in the understanding of cause and effect; why rebirth happens the way it does. Such knowledge, however, is not infallible, as the Buddha warns in DN 1:2.5.3 and MN 136. The experience is one thing; the inferences drawn from it are another. One should draw conclusions only tentatively, after long experience. | “Clairvoyance” renders dibbacakkhu (“celestial eye”), for which see Chāndogya Upaniṣad 8.12.5, “the mind is (the self’s) celestial eye” (mano’sya daivaṁ cakṣuḥ).

27.13.12.1Suppose there was a stilt longhouse at the central square. A person with clear eyes standing there might see humans entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square. They’d think: ‘These are people entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square.’ This simile is also found at DN 10:2.33.1. The Majjhima employs a slightly different simile (MN 39:20.3, MN 77:35.2, MN 130:2.1). | Pāsāda is often translated as “palace” or “mansion”, but in early Pali it meant a “stilt longhouse”. As here, it is an elevated place from which one can observe the street below.

27.13.12.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. 27.13.12.3[…]27.13.12.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.

27.13.13.05.3.8. Ending of Defilements

27.13.13.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. This is the experience of awakening that is the true goal of the Buddhist path. The defilements—properties of the mind that create suffering—have been curbed by the practice of ethics and suppressed by the power of jhāna. Here they are eliminated forever. 27.13.13.2They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. These are the four noble truths, which form the main content of the Buddha’s first sermon. They are the overarching principle into which all other teachings fall. The initial realization of the four noble truths indicates the first stage of awakening, stream-entry. 27.13.13.3They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. The application of the four noble truths to defilements indicates that this is the final stage of awakening, perfection (or “arahantship”, arahatta). | Many translators use “defilement” to render kilesa, but since kilesa appears only rarely in the early texts, I use “defilement” for āsava. Both terms refer to a stain, corruption, or pollution in the mind. 27.13.13.4Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. Bhavāsava is the defilement that craves to continue life in a new birth. 27.13.13.5When they’re freed, they know they’re freed. This is a reflective awareness of the fact of awakening. The meditator reviews their mind and sees that it is free from all forces that lead to suffering. 27.14They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ This is a standard declaration of full awakening in the suttas, said both of the Buddha and of any arahant (“perfected one”). Each of the four phrases illustrates a cardinal principle of awakening. (1) Further transmigration through rebirths has come to an end due to the exhaustion (khīṇa) of that which propels rebirth, namely deeds motivated by craving. (2) The eightfold path has been developed fully in all respects. (3) All functions relating to the four noble truths have been completed, namely: understanding suffering, letting go craving, witnessing extinguishment, and developing the path. (4) Extinguishment is final, with no falling back to this or any other state of existence. | For “state of existence” (literally “thusness”, itthatta), see DN 15:21.4.

27.14.1.1Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, and pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, and pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’ Once again the pool of water represents the mind, but now the meditator is not immersed in the experience, but looks back and reviews it objectively.

27.14.1.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. 27.15This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.16And, brahmin, there is no other accomplishment of sacrifice which is better and finer than this.” The entire path may be described as a “sacrifice”.

28.06. Kūṭadanta Declares Himself a Lay Follower

28.1When he had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, 28.2“Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! 28.3As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. 28.4I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. 28.5From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.

28.6And these bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats, and rams—seven hundred of each—I release them, I grant them life! Let them eat green grass and drink cool water, and may a cool breeze blow upon them!” Releasing animals remains a Buddhist practice today.

29.07. The Realization of the Fruit of Stream-Entry

29.1Then the Buddha taught Kūṭadanta step by step, with 29.2a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He explained the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. 29.3And when he knew that Kūṭadanta’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he explained the special teaching of the Buddhas: 29.4suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. 29.5Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, 29.6in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the brahmin Kūṭadanta: 29.7“Everything that has a beginning has an end.”

30.1Then Kūṭadanta saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha, 30.2“Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” 30.3The Buddha consented with silence.

30.4Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Kūṭadanta got up from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving. 30.5And when the night had passed Kūṭadanta had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own sacrificial enclosure. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, 30.6“It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”

30.7Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the sacrificial enclosure of Kūṭadanta together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat on the seat spread out.

30.8Then Kūṭadanta served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. 30.9When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Kūṭadanta took a low seat and sat to one side. 30.10Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk, after which he got up from his seat and left.

30.11[…]

1.01. Khāṇumatakabrāhmaṇagahapatikā

1.1Evaṁ me sutaṁ—1.2ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena khāṇumataṁ nāma magadhānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. 1.3Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ.

1.4Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. 1.5Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyañño upakkhaṭo hoti. 1.6Satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni thūṇūpanītāni honti yaññatthāya.

2.1Assosuṁ kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:

2.2“samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 2.3Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 2.4‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. 2.5So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. 2.6So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. 2.7Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.

2.8Atha kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamanti.

3.1Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti. 3.2Addasā kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamante. 3.3Disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: 3.4“kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamantī”ti?

3.5“Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto, khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 3.6Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 3.7‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. 3.8Tamete bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.

4.1Atha kho kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: 4.2“sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ: 4.3‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. 4.4Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. 4.5Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 4.6Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ puccheyyan”ti.

4.7Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khattaṁ āmantesi: 4.8“tena hi, bho khatte, yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: 4.9‘kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha—4.10āgamentu kira bhavanto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.

4.11“Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: 4.12“kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha: 4.13‘āgamentu kira bhonto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.

5.02. Kūṭadantaguṇakathā

5.1Tena kho pana samayena anekāni brāhmaṇasatāni khāṇumate paṭivasanti: 5.2“kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyaññaṁ anubhavissāmā”ti. 5.3Assosuṁ kho te brāhmaṇā: 5.4“kūṭadanto kira brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. 5.5Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ:

5.6“saccaṁ kira bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti?

5.7“Evaṁ kho me, bho, hoti: 5.8‘ahampi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmī’”ti.

6.1“Mā bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkami. 6.2Na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.3Sace bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati. 6.4Yampi bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.5Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

6.6Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 6.7Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.8Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

6.9Bhavañhi kūṭadanto aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtajātarūparajato …pe…

6.10Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe…

6.11Bhavañhi kūṭadanto abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…

6.12Bhavañhi kūṭadanto sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe…

6.13Bhavañhi kūṭadanto kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…

6.14Bhavañhi kūṭadanto bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo tīṇi māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti, bahū kho pana nānādisā nānājanapadā māṇavakā āgacchanti bhoto kūṭadantassa santike mantatthikā mante adhiyitukāmā …pe…

6.15Bhavañhi kūṭadanto jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto. 6.16Samaṇo gotamo taruṇo ceva taruṇapabbajito ca …pe…

6.17Bhavañhi kūṭadanto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

6.18Bhavañhi kūṭadanto brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

6.19Bhavañhi kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. 6.20Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ, raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.21Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.

7.03. Buddhaguṇakathā

7.1Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca:

7.2“Tena hi, bho, mamapi suṇātha, yathā mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ, 7.3na tveva arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.4Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 7.5Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.6Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

7.7Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo mahantaṁ ñātisaṅghaṁ ohāya pabbajito …pe…

7.8Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ ohāya pabbajito bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhaṁ ca …pe…

7.9Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo daharova samāno yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…

7.10Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…

7.11Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…

7.12Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlī kusalasīlī kusalasīlena samannāgato …pe…

7.13Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…

7.14Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo …pe…

7.15Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khīṇakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo …pe…

7.16Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kammavādī kiriyavādī apāpapurekkhāro brahmaññāya pajāya …pe…

7.17Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo uccā kulā pabbajito asambhinnakhattiyakulā …pe…

7.18Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo aḍḍhā kulā pabbajito mahaddhanā mahābhogā …pe…

7.19Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā pañhaṁ pucchituṁ āgacchanti …pe…

7.20Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ anekāni devatāsahassāni pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gatāni …pe…

7.21Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 7.22‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti …pe…

7.23Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato …pe…

7.24Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ehisvāgatavādī sakhilo sammodako abbhākuṭiko uttānamukho pubbabhāsī …pe…

7.25Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo catunnaṁ parisānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.26Samaṇe khalu, bho, gotame bahū devā ca manussā ca abhippasannā …pe…

7.27Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo yasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā paṭivasati na tasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā amanussā manusse viheṭhenti …pe…

7.28Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo saṅghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo puthutitthakarānaṁ aggamakkhāyati, yathā kho pana, bho, etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ yathā vā tathā vā yaso samudāgacchati, na hevaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato. 7.29Atha kho anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato …pe…

7.30Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.31Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.32Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.33Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.34Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.35Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.36Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 7.37Ye kho pana, bho, keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amhākaṁ gāmakhettaṁ āgacchanti, atithī no te honti. 7.38Atithī kho panamhehi sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā apacetabbā. 7.39Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ, atithimhākaṁ samaṇo gotamo. 7.40Atithi kho panamhehi sakkātabbo garukātabbo mānetabbo pūjetabbo apacetabbo. 7.41Imināpaṅgena nārahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.42Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.43Ettake kho ahaṁ, bho, tassa bhoto gotamassa vaṇṇe pariyāpuṇāmi, no ca kho so bhavaṁ gotamo ettakavaṇṇo. 7.44Aparimāṇavaṇṇo hi so bhavaṁ gotamo”ti.

7.45Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: 7.46“yathā kho bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇe bhāsati, ito cepi so bhavaṁ gotamo yojanasate viharati, alameva saddhena kulaputtena dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ api puṭosenā”ti.

7.47“Tena hi, bho, sabbeva mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

8.04. Mahāvijitarājayaññakathā

8.1Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena ambalaṭṭhikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. 8.2Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. 8.3Khāṇumatakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

9.1Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 9.2“sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: 9.3‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. 9.4Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. 9.5Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 9.6Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ desetū”ti.

9.7“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇāhi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.

9.8“Evaṁ, bho”ti kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. 9.9Bhagavā etadavoca: 10.1“bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito nāma ahosi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. 10.2Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rañño mahāvijitassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: 10.3‘adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi, yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ, yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

10.4Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: 10.5‘idha mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: 10.6“adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi. Yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. 10.7Icchāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 10.8Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

11.1Evaṁ vutte, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ etadavoca: 11.2‘bhoto kho rañño janapado sakaṇṭako sauppīḷo, gāmaghātāpi dissanti, nigamaghātāpi dissanti, nagaraghātāpi dissanti, panthaduhanāpi dissanti. 11.3Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā evaṁ sakaṇṭake janapade sauppīḷe balimuddhareyya, akiccakārī assa tena bhavaṁ rājā.

11.4Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño evamassa: 11.5“ahametaṁ dassukhīlaṁ vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā samūhanissāmī”ti, na kho panetassa dassukhīlassa evaṁ sammā samugghāto hoti. 11.6Ye te hatāvasesakā bhavissanti, te pacchā rañño janapadaṁ viheṭhessanti.

11.7Api ca kho idaṁ saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma evametassa dassukhīlassa sammā samugghāto hoti. 11.8Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bījabhattaṁ anuppadetu. 11.9Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā pābhataṁ anuppadetu. 11.10Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti rājaporise, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bhattavetanaṁ pakappetu. 11.11Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhessanti; 11.12mahā ca rañño rāsiko bhavissati. 11.13Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharissantī’ti.

11.14‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade ussahiṁsu kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bījabhattaṁ anuppadāsi. 11.15Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito pābhataṁ anuppadāsi. 11.16Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu rājaporise, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bhattavetanaṁ pakappesi. 11.17Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhiṁsu, mahā ca rañño rāsiko ahosi. 11.18Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe vihariṁsu.

11.19Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: 11.20‘samūhato kho me bhoto dassukhīlo, bhoto saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma mahā ca me rāsiko. 11.21Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharanti. 11.22Icchāmahaṁ brāhmaṇa mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 11.23Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

12.04.1. Catuparikkhāra

12.1Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. Ye bhoto rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: 12.2‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

12.3‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: 12.4‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. 12.5‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. 12.6Ye rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: 12.7‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. 12.8‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. 12.9Itime cattāro anumatipakkhā tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

13.04.2. Aṭṭhaparikkhāra

13.1Rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato—

13.2ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;

13.3abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya;

13.4aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro;

13.5balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā;

13.6saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti;

13.7bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa, tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: 13.8‘ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho’ti;

13.9paṇḍito, viyatto, medhāvī, paṭibalo, atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ.

13.10Rājā mahāvijito imehi aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato. 13.11Iti imānipi aṭṭhaṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

14.04.3. Catuparikkhāra

14.1Purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato,

14.2ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;

14.3ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo;

14.4sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato;

14.5paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ.

14.6Purohito brāhmaṇo imehi catūhaṅgehi samannāgato. 14.7Iti imānipi cattāri aṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

15.04.4. Tissovidhā

15.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi. 15.2Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhukāmassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.3‘“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchissatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. 15.4Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.5“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. 15.6Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.7“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigato”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo’ti.

15.8Imā kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi.

16.04.5. Dasaākāra

16.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.

16.2‘Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ pāṇātipātinopi pāṇātipātā paṭiviratāpi. 16.3Ye tattha pāṇātipātino, tesaññeva tena. 16.4Ye tattha pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

16.5Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ adinnādāyinopi adinnādānā paṭiviratāpi …pe… 16.6kāmesu micchācārinopi kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratāpi … 16.7musāvādinopi musāvādā paṭiviratāpi … 16.8pisuṇavācinopi pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … 16.9pharusavācinopi pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … 16.10samphappalāpinopi samphappalāpā paṭiviratāpi … 16.11abhijjhālunopi anabhijjhālunopi … 16.12byāpannacittāpi abyāpannacittāpi … 16.13micchādiṭṭhikāpi sammādiṭṭhikāpi …. 16.14Ye tattha micchādiṭṭhikā, tesaññeva tena. 16.15Ye tattha sammādiṭṭhikā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetū’ti.

16.16Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.

17.04.6. Soḷasākāra

17.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi

17.2siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.3‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca; 17.4atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.5Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.6Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. 17.7Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.8Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.9‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.10Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.11Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. 17.12Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.13Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.14‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.15Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.16Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 17.17Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. 17.18Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.19‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati no ca kho abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe… 17.20no ca kho aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro …pe… 17.21no ca kho balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā …pe… 17.22no ca kho saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti …pe… 17.23no ca kho bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa …pe… 17.24no ca kho tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: 17.25“ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho, ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho”ti …pe… 17.26no ca kho paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.27Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.28Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ. 17.29Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.30Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.31‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. 17.32No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; 17.33atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.34Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.35Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 17.36Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. 17.37Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.38‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. 17.39No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe… 17.40no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe… 17.41no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.42Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.43Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. 17.44Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetūti.

17.45Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahi ākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

18.1Tasmiṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññe neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. 18.2Yepissa ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. 18.3Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; 18.4yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu, na taṁ akaṁsu. 18.5Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva so yañño niṭṭhānamagamāsi.

19.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ ādāya rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: 19.2‘idaṁ, deva, pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ devaññeva uddissābhataṁ, taṁ devo paṭiggaṇhātū’ti.

19.3‘Alaṁ, bho, mamāpidaṁ pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ dhammikena balinā abhisaṅkhataṁ; 19.4tañca vo hotu, ito ca bhiyyo harathā’ti.

19.5Te raññā paṭikkhittā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: 19.6‘na kho etaṁ amhākaṁ patirūpaṁ, yaṁ mayaṁ imāni sāpateyyāni punadeva sakāni gharāni paṭihareyyāma. 19.7Rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, handassa mayaṁ anuyāgino homā’ti.

20.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, puratthimena yaññavāṭassa khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.2Dakkhiṇena yaññavāṭassa amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.3Pacchimena yaññavāṭassa brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.4Uttarena yaññavāṭassa gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ.

20.5Tesupi kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññesu neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. 20.6Yepi nesaṁ ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. 20.7Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; 20.8yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu na taṁ akaṁsu. 20.9Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva te yaññā niṭṭhānamagamaṁsu.

20.10Iti cattāro ca anumatipakkhā, rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato, purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato; 20.11tisso ca vidhā. 20.12Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tividhā yaññasampadā soḷasaparikkhārā”ti.

21.1Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: 21.2“aho yañño, aho yaññasampadā”ti.

21.3Kūṭadanto pana brāhmaṇo tūṇhībhūtova nisinno hoti. 21.4Atha kho te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: 21.5“kasmā pana bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodatī”ti?

21.6“Nāhaṁ, bho, samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodāmi. 21.7Muddhāpi tassa vipateyya, yo samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodeyya.

21.8Api ca me, bho, evaṁ hoti—21.9samaṇo gotamo na evamāha: 21.10‘evaṁ me sutan’ti vā ‘evaṁ arahati bhavitun’ti vā; 21.11api ca samaṇo gotamo: 21.12‘evaṁ tadā āsi, itthaṁ tadā āsi’ tveva bhāsati.

21.13Tassa mayhaṁ bho evaṁ hoti: 21.14‘addhā samaṇo gotamo tena samayena rājā vā ahosi mahāvijito yaññassāmi purohito vā brāhmaṇo tassa yaññassa yājetā’ti.

21.15Abhijānāti pana bhavaṁ gotamo evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā”ti?

21.16“Abhijānāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā, ahaṁ tena samayena purohito brāhmaṇo ahosiṁ tassa yaññassa yājetā”ti.

22.05. Niccadānaanukulayañña

22.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

22.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

22.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

22.4“Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; 22.5ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

23.1“Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti?

23.2“Na kho, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. 23.3Taṁ kissa hetu? 23.4Dissanti hettha, brāhmaṇa, daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ na upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.

23.5Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; 23.6evarūpaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. 23.7Taṁ kissa hetu? 23.8Na hettha, brāhmaṇa, dissanti daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.

23.9Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti.

24.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

24.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

24.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

24.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, cātuddisaṁ saṅghaṁ uddissa vihāraṁ karoti, ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

25.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

25.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

25.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

25.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati; 25.5ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

26.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

26.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

26.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

26.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto sikkhāpadāni samādiyati—26.5pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṁ, adinnādānā veramaṇiṁ, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇiṁ, musāvādā veramaṇiṁ, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiṁ. 26.6Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

27.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

27.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

27.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

27.4“idha, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. 27.4.1.2So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. 27.4.1.3So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.

27.4.2.1Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. 27.4.2.2So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. 27.4.2.3So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: 27.4.2.4‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. 27.4.2.5Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. 27.4.2.6Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.

27.4.2.7So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.

27.4.3.1So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo sīlasampanno, indriyesu guttadvāro, satisampajaññena samannāgato, santuṭṭho.

27.4.4.0.15.1. Sīla

27.4.4.0.25.1.1. Cūḷasīla

27.4.4.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti? 27.4.4.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. 27.4.4.3Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.4.4Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati. 27.4.4.5Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.4.6Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. 27.4.4.7Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.1Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. 27.4.5.2Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.3Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya; amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā, amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. 27.4.5.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.5Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. 27.4.5.6Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.7Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. 27.4.5.8Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.6.1Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti …pe… 27.4.6.2ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. 27.4.6.3Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.4Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.5Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.6Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.7Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.8Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.9Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.10Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.11Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.12Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.13Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.14Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.15Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.16Kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.17Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.18Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.19Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.20Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.6.21Cūḷasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.4.7.05.1.2. Majjhimasīla

27.4.7.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.7.2Seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ, iti evarūpā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.7.3Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.8.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ sannidhikāraparibhogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.8.2Seyyathidaṁ—annasannidhiṁ pānasannidhiṁ vatthasannidhiṁ yānasannidhiṁ sayanasannidhiṁ gandhasannidhiṁ āmisasannidhiṁ, 27.4.8.3iti vā iti evarūpā sannidhikāraparibhogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.8.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.9.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ visūkadassanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.9.2Seyyathidaṁ—naccaṁ gītaṁ vāditaṁ pekkhaṁ akkhānaṁ pāṇissaraṁ vetāḷaṁ kumbhathūṇaṁ sobhanakaṁ caṇḍālaṁ vaṁsaṁ dhovanaṁ hatthiyuddhaṁ assayuddhaṁ mahiṁsayuddhaṁ usabhayuddhaṁ ajayuddhaṁ meṇḍayuddhaṁ kukkuṭayuddhaṁ vaṭṭakayuddhaṁ daṇḍayuddhaṁ muṭṭhiyuddhaṁ nibbuddhaṁ uyyodhikaṁ balaggaṁ senābyūhaṁ anīkadassanaṁ 27.4.9.3iti vā iti evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.9.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.10.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.10.2Seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhapadaṁ dasapadaṁ ākāsaṁ parihārapathaṁ santikaṁ khalikaṁ ghaṭikaṁ salākahatthaṁ akkhaṁ paṅgacīraṁ vaṅkakaṁ mokkhacikaṁ ciṅgulikaṁ pattāḷhakaṁ rathakaṁ dhanukaṁ akkharikaṁ manesikaṁ yathāvajjaṁ 27.4.10.3iti vā iti evarūpā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.10.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.11.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ uccāsayanamahāsayanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.11.2Seyyathidaṁ—āsandiṁ pallaṅkaṁ gonakaṁ cittakaṁ paṭikaṁ paṭalikaṁ tūlikaṁ vikatikaṁ uddalomiṁ ekantalomiṁ kaṭṭissaṁ koseyyaṁ kuttakaṁ hatthattharaṁ assattharaṁ rathattharaṁ ajinappaveṇiṁ kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṁ sauttaracchadaṁ ubhatolohitakūpadhānaṁ 27.4.11.3iti vā iti evarūpā uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.11.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.12.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.12.2Seyyathidaṁ—ucchādanaṁ parimaddanaṁ nhāpanaṁ sambāhanaṁ ādāsaṁ añjanaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ mukhacuṇṇaṁ mukhalepanaṁ hatthabandhaṁ sikhābandhaṁ daṇḍaṁ nāḷikaṁ asiṁ chattaṁ citrupāhanaṁ uṇhīsaṁ maṇiṁ vālabījaniṁ odātāni vatthāni dīghadasāni 27.4.12.3iti vā iti evarūpā maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.12.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.13.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.13.2Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ 27.4.13.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānakathāya paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.13.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.14.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ viggāhikakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.14.2Seyyathidaṁ—na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi, micchā paṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammā paṭipanno, sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te, pure vacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchā vacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti 27.4.14.3iti vā iti evarūpāya viggāhikakathāya paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.14.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.15.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.15.2Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ, rājamahāmattānaṁ, khattiyānaṁ, brāhmaṇānaṁ, gahapatikānaṁ, kumārānaṁ—idha gaccha, amutrāgaccha, idaṁ hara, amutra idaṁ āharā’ti 27.4.15.3iti vā iti evarūpā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.15.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.16.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te kuhakā ca honti lapakā ca nemittikā ca nippesikā ca lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsitāro ca. Iti evarūpā kuhanalapanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.16.2Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.16.3Majjhimasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.4.17.05.1.3. Mahāsīla

27.4.17.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.17.2Seyyathidaṁ—aṅgaṁ nimittaṁ uppātaṁ supinaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ mūsikacchinnaṁ aggihomaṁ dabbihomaṁ thusahomaṁ kaṇahomaṁ taṇḍulahomaṁ sappihomaṁ telahomaṁ mukhahomaṁ lohitahomaṁ aṅgavijjā vatthuvijjā khattavijjā sivavijjā bhūtavijjā bhūrivijjā ahivijjā visavijjā vicchikavijjā mūsikavijjā sakuṇavijjā vāyasavijjā pakkajjhānaṁ saraparittāṇaṁ migacakkaṁ 27.4.17.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.17.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.18.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.18.2Seyyathidaṁ—maṇilakkhaṇaṁ vatthalakkhaṇaṁ daṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ satthalakkhaṇaṁ asilakkhaṇaṁ usulakkhaṇaṁ dhanulakkhaṇaṁ āvudhalakkhaṇaṁ itthilakkhaṇaṁ purisalakkhaṇaṁ kumāralakkhaṇaṁ kumārilakkhaṇaṁ dāsalakkhaṇaṁ dāsilakkhaṇaṁ hatthilakkhaṇaṁ assalakkhaṇaṁ mahiṁsalakkhaṇaṁ usabhalakkhaṇaṁ golakkhaṇaṁ ajalakkhaṇaṁ meṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ kukkuṭalakkhaṇaṁ vaṭṭakalakkhaṇaṁ godhālakkhaṇaṁ kaṇṇikalakkhaṇaṁ kacchapalakkhaṇaṁ migalakkhaṇaṁ 27.4.18.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.18.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.19.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.19.2Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ niyyānaṁ bhavissati, raññaṁ aniyyānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, iti imassa jayo bhavissati, imassa parājayo bhavissati 27.4.19.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.19.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.20.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.20.2Seyyathidaṁ—candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissati, nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, ukkāpāto bhavissati, disāḍāho bhavissati, bhūmicālo bhavissati, devadudrabhi bhavissati, candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko candaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko sūriyaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissati, evaṁvipāko disāḍāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko bhūmicālo bhavissati, evaṁvipāko devadudrabhi bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati 27.4.20.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.20.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.21.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.21.2Seyyathidaṁ—suvuṭṭhikā bhavissati, dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissati, subhikkhaṁ bhavissati, dubbhikkhaṁ bhavissati, khemaṁ bhavissati, bhayaṁ bhavissati, rogo bhavissati, ārogyaṁ bhavissati, muddā, gaṇanā, saṅkhānaṁ, kāveyyaṁ, lokāyataṁ 27.4.21.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.21.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.22.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.22.2Seyyathidaṁ—āvāhanaṁ vivāhanaṁ saṁvaraṇaṁ vivaraṇaṁ saṅkiraṇaṁ vikiraṇaṁ subhagakaraṇaṁ dubbhagakaraṇaṁ viruddhagabbhakaraṇaṁ jivhānibandhanaṁ hanusaṁhananaṁ hatthābhijappanaṁ hanujappanaṁ kaṇṇajappanaṁ ādāsapañhaṁ kumārikapañhaṁ devapañhaṁ ādiccupaṭṭhānaṁ mahatupaṭṭhānaṁ abbhujjalanaṁ sirivhāyanaṁ 27.4.22.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.22.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.23.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.23.2Seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ bhūtakammaṁ bhūrikammaṁ vassakammaṁ vossakammaṁ vatthukammaṁ vatthuparikammaṁ ācamanaṁ nhāpanaṁ juhanaṁ vamanaṁ virecanaṁ uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ sīsavirecanaṁ kaṇṇatelaṁ nettatappanaṁ natthukammaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ sālākiyaṁ sallakattiyaṁ dārakatikicchā, mūlabhesajjānaṁ anuppadānaṁ, osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho 27.4.23.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.23.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.24.1Sa kho so, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. 27.4.24.2Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto nihatapaccāmitto na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ paccatthikato; 27.4.24.3evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. 27.4.24.4So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. 27.5Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.

27.5.1.6Mahāsīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.5.2.0.15.2. Samādhi

27.5.2.0.25.2.1. Indriyasaṁvara

27.5.2.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti? 27.5.2.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. 27.5.2.3Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. 27.5.2.4Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… 27.5.2.5ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… 27.5.2.6jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… 27.5.2.7kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… 27.5.2.8manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. 27.5.2.9Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. 27.5.2.10So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. 27.5.2.11Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti.

27.5.3.05.2.2. Satisampajañña

27.5.3.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti? 27.5.3.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. 27.5.3.3Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti.

27.5.4.05.2.3. Santosa

27.5.4.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti? 27.5.4.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. 27.5.4.3Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti, sapattabhārova ḍeti; 27.5.4.4evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. 27.5.4.5Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti.

27.5.5.05.2.4. Nīvaraṇappahāna

27.5.5.1So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, 27.5.5.2vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. 27.5.5.3So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.

27.5.6.1So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.2Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.3Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī, sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.4Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.5Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati, akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.

27.5.7.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojeyya. 27.5.7.2Tassa te kammantā samijjheyyuṁ. 27.5.7.3So yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ kareyya, siyā cassa uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāya. 27.5.7.4Tassa evamassa: 27.5.7.5‘ahaṁ kho pubbe iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojesiṁ. 27.5.7.6Tassa me te kammantā samijjhiṁsu. 27.5.7.7Sohaṁ yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ akāsiṁ, atthi ca me uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. 27.5.7.8So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.8.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso ābādhiko assa dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; bhattañcassa nacchādeyya, na cassa kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.2So aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā mucceyya; bhattaṁ cassa chādeyya, siyā cassa kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.8.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe ābādhiko ahosiṁ dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; 27.5.8.5bhattañca me nacchādesi, na ca me āsi kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.6Somhi etarahi tamhā ābādhā mutto; 27.5.8.7bhattañca me chādeti, atthi ca me kāye balamattā’ti. 27.5.8.8So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.9.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso bandhanāgāre baddho assa. 27.5.9.2So aparena samayena tamhā bandhanāgārā mucceyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. 27.5.9.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.9.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe bandhanāgāre baddho ahosiṁ, somhi etarahi tamhā bandhanāgārā mutto sotthinā abbhayena. 27.5.9.5Natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. 27.5.9.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.10.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso dāso assa anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.2So aparena samayena tamhā dāsabyā mucceyya attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.10.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe dāso ahosiṁ anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.5Somhi etarahi tamhā dāsabyā mutto attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo’ti. 27.5.10.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.11.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjeyya dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.2So aparena samayena taṁ kantāraṁ nitthareyya sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anupāpuṇeyya khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.11.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjiṁ dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.5Somhi etarahi taṁ kantāraṁ nitthiṇṇo sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anuppatto khemaṁ appaṭibhayan’ti. 27.5.11.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.12.1Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu yathā iṇaṁ yathā rogaṁ yathā bandhanāgāraṁ yathā dāsabyaṁ yathā kantāraddhānamaggaṁ, evaṁ ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīne attani samanupassati.

27.5.12.2Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, yathā āṇaṇyaṁ yathā ārogyaṁ yathā bandhanāmokkhaṁ yathā bhujissaṁ yathā khemantabhūmiṁ; 27.5.12.3evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassati.

27.5.12.4Tassime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.

27.5.13.05.2.5. Paṭhamajhāna

27.6So vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.6.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.6.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya, sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena, na ca paggharaṇī; 27.6.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.7ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.7.1.05.2.6. Dutiyajhāna

27.8Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.8.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.8.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. 27.8.2.2Atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.

27.8.2.3Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.8.2.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.8.3.05.2.7. Tatiyajhāna

27.9Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.9.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.9.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; 27.9.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.9.2.3ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.9.3.05.2.8. Catutthajhāna

27.10Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.10.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.10.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa; 27.10.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.11ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.11.1.0.15.3. Aṭṭhañāṇa

27.11.1.0.25.3.1. Vipassanāñāṇa

27.12So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.12.1.2So evaṁ pajānāti: 27.12.1.3‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; 27.12.1.4idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti.

27.12.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. 27.12.2.2Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. 27.12.2.3Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: 27.12.2.4‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno; 27.12.2.5tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.

27.12.2.6Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.12.2.7So evaṁ pajānāti: 27.12.2.8‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; 27.12.2.9idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti. 27.13ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.1.05.3.2. Manomayiddhiñāṇa

27.13.1.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.1.2So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ.

27.13.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso muñjamhā īsikaṁ pavāheyya. 27.13.2.2Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.3‘ayaṁ muñjo, ayaṁ īsikā, añño muñjo, aññā īsikā, muñjamhā tveva īsikā pavāḷhā’ti. 27.13.2.4Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso asiṁ kosiyā pavāheyya. 27.13.2.5Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.6‘ayaṁ asi, ayaṁ kosi, añño asi, aññā kosi, kosiyā tveva asi pavāḷho’ti. 27.13.2.7Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya. 27.13.2.8Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.9‘ayaṁ ahi, ayaṁ karaṇḍo. Añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo, karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’ti.

27.13.2.10Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.2.11So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. 27.13.2.12ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.3.05.3.3. Iddhividhañāṇa

27.13.3.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.3.2So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.

27.13.4.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, dakkho kumbhakāro vā kumbhakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatāya mattikāya yaṁ yadeva bhājanavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. 27.13.4.2Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, dakkho dantakāro vā dantakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ dantasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva dantavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. 27.13.4.3Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ suvaṇṇasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva suvaṇṇavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya.

27.13.4.4Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.4.5So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti. 27.13.4.6ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.5.05.3.4. Dibbasotañāṇa

27.13.5.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.5.2So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca.

27.13.6.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno. So suṇeyya bherisaddampi mudiṅgasaddampi saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘bherisaddo’ itipi, ‘mudiṅgasaddo’ itipi, ‘saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddo’ itipi.

27.13.6.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.6.3So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. 27.13.6.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.7.05.3.5. Cetopariyañāṇa

27.13.7.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.7.2So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti—27.13.7.3sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.4vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.5sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.6vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.7samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.8vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.9saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.10vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.11mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.12amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.13sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.14anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.15samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.16asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.17vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.18avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.

27.13.8.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanajātiko ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodāte acche vā udakapatte sakaṁ mukhanimittaṁ paccavekkhamāno sakaṇikaṁ vā ‘sakaṇikan’ti jāneyya, akaṇikaṁ vā ‘akaṇikan’ti jāneyya; 27.13.8.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.8.3So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti—27.13.8.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.9.05.3.6. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa

27.13.9.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.9.2So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.

27.13.10.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya. So tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatra evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrāpi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti.

27.13.10.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.10.3So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. 27.13.10.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.11.05.3.7. Dibbacakkhuñāṇa

27.13.11.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.11.2So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.

27.13.12.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, majjhe siṅghāṭake pāsādo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi rathikāyapi vīthiṁ sañcarante majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnepi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ete manussā gehaṁ pavisanti, ete nikkhamanti, ete rathikāya vīthiṁ sañcaranti, ete majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā’ti.

27.13.12.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.12.3So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate; yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. 27.13.12.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.13.05.3.8. Āsavakkhayañāṇa

27.13.13.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.13.2So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. 27.13.13.3Ime āsavāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. 27.13.13.4Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, 27.13.13.5vimuttasmiṁ ‘vimuttam’iti ñāṇaṁ hoti, 27.14‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.

27.14.1.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakathalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti.

27.14.1.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.15Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca. 27.16Imāya ca, brāhmaṇa, yaññasampadāya aññā yaññasampadā uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthī”ti.

28.06. Kūṭadantaupāsakattapaṭivedanā

28.1Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 28.2“abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. 28.3Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. 28.4Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. 28.5Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.

28.6Esāhaṁ, bho gotama, satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni muñcāmi, jīvitaṁ demi, haritāni ceva tiṇāni khādantu, sītāni ca pānīyāni pivantu, sīto ca nesaṁ vāto upavāyatū”ti.

29.07. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyā

29.1Atha kho bhagavā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—29.2dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ; kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. 29.3Yadā bhagavā aññāsi kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi—29.4dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. 29.5Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; 29.6evameva kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa tasmiññeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: 29.7“yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.

30.1Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 30.2“adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. 30.3Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

30.4Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. 30.5Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake yaññavāṭe paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: 30.6“kālo, bho gotama; niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

30.7Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa yaññavāṭo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

30.8Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. 30.9Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. 30.10Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti.

30.11Kūṭadantasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.

1.01. The Brahmins and Householders of Khāṇumata 1.01. Khāṇumatakabrāhmaṇagahapatikā

1.1So I have heard. When asked about sacrifice, the Buddha tells a story of how a king was persuaded to forgo cruelty and institute a constructive social policy of welfare instead. 1.1Evaṁ me sutaṁ—1.2At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Magadhans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Magadhan brahmins named Khāṇumata. Khāṇumata is only mentioned here. It means “stumpy”, perhaps indicating that it was, or had recently been, a rough out-of-the-way place. 1.2ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena khāṇumataṁ nāma magadhānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. 1.3There he stayed nearby at Ambalaṭṭhikā. The commentary says this was similar to the Ambalaṭṭhikā of DN 1:1.2.1. 1.3Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ.

1.4Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta was living in Khāṇumata. It was a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. Like the town Khāṇumata, the brahmin Kūṭadanta appears only here. His name means “pointy teeth”, but there is no evidence that he was a vampire. 1.4Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. 1.5Now at that time Kūṭadanta had prepared a great sacrifice. 1.5Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyañño upakkhaṭo hoti. 1.6Bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats and rams—seven hundred of each—had been led to the post for the sacrifice. At Snp 2.7:26.1, the sacrifice of cows in particular was said to be the nadir of decline for brahmins. When similar sacrifices are described elsewhere in the canon, the number is five hundred rather than seven hundred (SN 3.9:1.2, AN 7.47:1.2). 1.6Satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni thūṇūpanītāni honti yaññatthāya.

2.1The brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata heard: 2.1Assosuṁ kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:

2.2“It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 2.2“samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 2.3He has this good reputation: 2.3Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 2.4‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ 2.4‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. 2.5He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. 2.5So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. 2.6He proclaims a teaching that is good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. 2.6So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. 2.7It’s good to see such perfected ones.” 2.7Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.

2.8Then, exiting Khāṇumata, they formed into companies and headed to Ambalaṭṭhikā. 2.8Atha kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamanti.

3.1Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. 3.1Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti. 3.2He saw the brahmins and householders heading for Ambalaṭṭhikā, 3.2Addasā kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamante. 3.3and addressed his butler, 3.3Disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: 3.4“My butler, why are the brahmins and householders headed for Ambalaṭṭhikā?” 3.4“kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamantī”ti?

3.5“The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 3.5“Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto, khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 3.6He has this good reputation: 3.6Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 3.7‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ 3.7‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. 3.8They’re going to see that worthy Gotama.” 3.8Tamete bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.

4.1Then Kūṭadanta thought, 4.1Atha kho kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: 4.2“I’ve heard that 4.2“sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ: 4.3the ascetic Gotama knows how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. News of the Buddha had spread in Brahmanical circles. In DN 3 we saw the Buddha use his rhetorical technique of adapting his teaching to reframe Brahmanical doctrines in order to establish a common ground. Here we see the downside to such techniques, as the details of the reframing have been lost. 4.3‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. 4.4I don’t know about that, 4.4Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. 4.5but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 4.5Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 4.6Why don’t I ask him how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories?” No such sacrifice has been identified in Brahmanical texts. 4.6Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ puccheyyan”ti.

4.7Then Kūṭadanta addressed his butler, 4.7Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khattaṁ āmantesi: 4.8“Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: 4.8“tena hi, bho khatte, yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: 4.9‘Sirs, the brahmin Kūṭadanta asks 4.9‘kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha—4.10you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Gotama.’” 4.10āgamentu kira bhavanto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.

4.11“Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked. 4.11“Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: 4.12[…]4.12“kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha: 4.13[…]4.13‘āgamentu kira bhonto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.

5.02. The Qualities of Kūṭadanta 5.02. Kūṭadantaguṇakathā

5.1Now at that time several hundred brahmins were residing in Khāṇumata 5.1Tena kho pana samayena anekāni brāhmaṇasatāni khāṇumate paṭivasanti: 5.2thinking to participate in Kūṭadanta’s sacrifice. 5.2“kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyaññaṁ anubhavissāmā”ti. 5.3They heard that 5.3Assosuṁ kho te brāhmaṇā: 5.4Kūṭadanta was going to see the ascetic Gotama. 5.4“kūṭadanto kira brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. 5.5They approached Kūṭadanta and said to him: 5.5Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ:

5.6“Is it really true that you are going to see the ascetic Gotama?” 5.6“saccaṁ kira bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti?

5.7“Yes, gentlemen, it is true.” 5.7“Evaṁ kho me, bho, hoti: 5.8[…]5.8‘ahampi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmī’”ti.

6.1“Please don’t! 6.1“Mā bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkami. 6.2It’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama. 6.2Na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.3For if you do so, your reputation will diminish and his will increase. 6.3Sace bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati. 6.4For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.4Yampi bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.5it’s appropriate that he comes to see you. 6.5Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

6.6You are well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 6.6Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 6.7For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.7Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.8it’s appropriate that he comes to see you. 6.8Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

6.9You’re rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of property and assets, and lots of money and grain … 6.9Bhavañhi kūṭadanto aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtajātarūparajato …pe…

6.10You recite and remember the hymns, and have mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. You know them word-by-word, and their grammar. You are well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. … 6.10Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe…

6.11You are attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. You have divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. … 6.11Bhavañhi kūṭadanto abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…

6.12You are ethical, mature in ethical conduct. … 6.12Bhavañhi kūṭadanto sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe…

6.13You’re a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. … 6.13Bhavañhi kūṭadanto kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…

6.14You teach the tutors of many, and teach three hundred young students to recite the hymns. Many students come from various districts and countries for the sake of the hymns, wishing to learn the hymns. … 6.14Bhavañhi kūṭadanto bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo tīṇi māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti, bahū kho pana nānādisā nānājanapadā māṇavakā āgacchanti bhoto kūṭadantassa santike mantatthikā mante adhiyitukāmā …pe…

6.15You’re old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life. 6.15Bhavañhi kūṭadanto jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto. 6.16The ascetic Gotama is young, and has newly gone forth. … 6.16Samaṇo gotamo taruṇo ceva taruṇapabbajito ca …pe…

6.17You’re honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha … 6.17Bhavañhi kūṭadanto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

6.18and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. … 6.18Bhavañhi kūṭadanto brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

6.19You live in Khāṇumata, a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. 6.19Bhavañhi kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. 6.20For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; 6.20Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ, raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 6.21it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.” 6.21Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.

7.03. The Qualities of the Buddha 7.03. Buddhaguṇakathā

7.1When they had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to those brahmins: 7.1Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca:

7.2“Well then, gentlemen, listen to why it’s appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama, 7.2“Tena hi, bho, mamapi suṇātha, yathā mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ, 7.3and it’s not appropriate for him to come to see me. 7.3na tveva arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.4He is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 7.4Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 7.5For this reason it’s not appropriate for the ascetic Gotama to come to see me; 7.5Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.6rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. 7.6Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.

7.7When he went forth he abandoned a large family circle. … 7.7Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo mahantaṁ ñātisaṅghaṁ ohāya pabbajito …pe…

7.8When he went forth he abandoned abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. … 7.8Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ ohāya pabbajito bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhaṁ ca …pe…

7.9He went forth from the lay life to homelessness while still a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. … 7.9Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo daharova samāno yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…

7.10Though his mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces, he shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. … 7.10Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…

7.11He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. … 7.11Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…

7.12He is ethical, possessing ethical conduct that is noble and skillful. … 7.12Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlī kusalasīlī kusalasīlena samannāgato …pe…

7.13He’s a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. … 7.13Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…

7.14He’s a tutor of tutors. … 7.14Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo …pe…

7.15He has ended sensual desire, and is rid of caprice. … 7.15Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khīṇakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo …pe…

7.16He teaches the efficacy of deeds and action. He doesn’t wish any harm upon the community of brahmins. … 7.16Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kammavādī kiriyavādī apāpapurekkhāro brahmaññāya pajāya …pe…

7.17He went forth from an eminent family of unbroken aristocratic lineage. … 7.17Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo uccā kulā pabbajito asambhinnakhattiyakulā …pe…

7.18He went forth from a rich, affluent, and wealthy family. … 7.18Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo aḍḍhā kulā pabbajito mahaddhanā mahābhogā …pe…

7.19People come from distant lands and distant countries to question him. … 7.19Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā pañhaṁ pucchituṁ āgacchanti …pe…

7.20Many thousands of deities have gone for refuge for life to him. … 7.20Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ anekāni devatāsahassāni pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gatāni …pe…

7.21He has this good reputation: 7.21Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: 7.22‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ … 7.22‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti …pe…

7.23He has the thirty-two marks of a great man. … 7.23Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato …pe…

7.24He is welcoming, congenial, polite, smiling, open, the first to speak. … 7.24Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ehisvāgatavādī sakhilo sammodako abbhākuṭiko uttānamukho pubbabhāsī …pe…

7.25He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by the four assemblies. … 7.25Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo catunnaṁ parisānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.26Many gods and humans are devoted to him. … 7.26Samaṇe khalu, bho, gotame bahū devā ca manussā ca abhippasannā …pe…

7.27While he is residing in a village or town, non-human entities do not harass them. … 7.27Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo yasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā paṭivasati na tasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā amanussā manusse viheṭhenti …pe…

7.28He leads an order and a community, and tutors a community, and is said to be the best of the various religious founders. He didn’t come by his fame in the same ways as those other ascetics and brahmins. 7.28Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo saṅghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo puthutitthakarānaṁ aggamakkhāyati, yathā kho pana, bho, etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ yathā vā tathā vā yaso samudāgacchati, na hevaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato. 7.29Rather, he came by his fame due to his supreme knowledge and conduct. … 7.29Atha kho anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato …pe…

7.30King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. … 7.30Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.31King Pasenadi of Kosala and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. … 7.31Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.32The brahmin Pokkharasāti and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. … 7.32Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…

7.33He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha … 7.33Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.34King Pasenadi of Kosala … 7.34Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.35and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. 7.35Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…

7.36The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. 7.36Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. 7.37Any ascetic or brahmin who comes to stay in our village district is our guest, 7.37Ye kho pana, bho, keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amhākaṁ gāmakhettaṁ āgacchanti, atithī no te honti. 7.38and should be honored and respected as such. 7.38Atithī kho panamhehi sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā apacetabbā. 7.39[…]7.39Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ, atithimhākaṁ samaṇo gotamo. 7.40[…]7.40Atithi kho panamhehi sakkātabbo garukātabbo mānetabbo pūjetabbo apacetabbo. 7.41For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for the worthy Gotama to come to see me, 7.41Imināpaṅgena nārahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.42rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. 7.42Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. 7.43This is the extent of the worthy Gotama’s praise that I have memorized. But his praises are not confined to this, 7.43Ettake kho ahaṁ, bho, tassa bhoto gotamassa vaṇṇe pariyāpuṇāmi, no ca kho so bhavaṁ gotamo ettakavaṇṇo. 7.44for the praise of the worthy Gotama is limitless.” 7.44Aparimāṇavaṇṇo hi so bhavaṁ gotamo”ti.

7.45When he had spoken, those brahmins said to him, 7.45Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: 7.46“According to Kūṭadanta’s praises, if the worthy Gotama were staying within a hundred leagues, it’d be worthwhile for a faithful gentleman to go to see him, even if he had to carry his own provisions in a knapsack.” 7.46“yathā kho bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇe bhāsati, ito cepi so bhavaṁ gotamo yojanasate viharati, alameva saddhena kulaputtena dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ api puṭosenā”ti.

7.47“Well then, gentlemen, let’s all go to see the ascetic Gotama.” 7.47“Tena hi, bho, sabbeva mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

8.04. The Story of King Mahāvijita’s Sacrifice 8.04. Mahāvijitarājayaññakathā

8.1Then Kūṭadanta together with a large group of brahmins went to see the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. 8.1Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena ambalaṭṭhikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. 8.2When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. 8.2Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. 8.3Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their joined palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent. 8.3Khāṇumatakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

9.1Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, 9.1Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 9.2“Worthy Gotama, I’ve heard that 9.2“sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: 9.3you know how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. 9.3‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. 9.4I don’t know about that, 9.4Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. 9.5but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 9.5Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 9.6Please teach me how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories.” 9.6Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ desetū”ti.

9.7“Well then, brahmin, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.” Kūṭadanta’s proposal that the Buddha advise him on the sacrifice of 700 animals is outrageous. Nonetheless, the Buddha responds politely since Kūṭadanta is being polite. While it is tempting to see the sacrifice of animals by supposedly virtuous priests as sheer hypocrisy, the fact of sacrifice remains one of the most widespread and mysterious of human religious practices. In an empathetic work that addresses this squarely, Roberto Calasso’s Ardor sees the vast complex of Vedic ritual and theory as making plain the fact of killing so that the guilt may be contained, in contrast with our modern culture of killing on an industrial scale while hiding it out of sight. 9.7“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇāhi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.

9.8“Yes, worthy sir,” Kūṭadanta replied. 9.8“Evaṁ, bho”ti kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. 9.9The Buddha said this: 9.9Bhagavā etadavoca: 10.1“Once upon a time, brahmin, there was a king named Mahāvijita. He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses. Mahāvijita means “Great Dominion”. He seems to be only known from this story. The idiom bhūtapubbaṁ (literally “so it was in the past”) introduces legendary narratives of usually dubious historicity, like the English idiom “once upon a time”. 10.1“bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito nāma ahosi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. 10.2Then as King Mahāvijita was in private retreat this thought came to his mind: In the Pali, meaningful thoughts often occur to people when withdrawn in seclusion. This doesn’t necessary mean they were in formal meditation. 10.2Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rañño mahāvijitassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: 10.3‘I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I hold a large sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’ The great sacrifices, especially the horse sacrifice, ensured royal authority. Their very scale and wastefulness showed off the wealth of the king. 10.3‘adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi, yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ, yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

10.4Then he summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: “High priest” is purohita. He was a family chaplain advising and consecrating the royal family. The closeness of the relationship is shown by the fact that the royal family would take the lineage name of the purohita. 10.4Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: 10.5‘Just now, brahmin, as I was in private retreat this thought came to mind, 10.5‘idha mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: 10.6“I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I perform a great sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.” 10.6“adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi. Yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. 10.7Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 10.7Icchāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 10.8Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’ 10.8Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

11.1When he had spoken, the brahmin high priest said to him: 11.1Evaṁ vutte, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ etadavoca: 11.2‘Sir, the king’s realm is harried and oppressed. Raiding of villages, towns, and cities has been seen, and infesting of highways. Then, as today, government policy was driven by the perception of rising crime rate. This whole passage is one of the Buddha’s most important statements on public policy. It is expressed through storytelling, giving a good example of how myths were invoked—and subverted—as rationales for current policy. 11.2‘bhoto kho rañño janapado sakaṇṭako sauppīḷo, gāmaghātāpi dissanti, nigamaghātāpi dissanti, nagaraghātāpi dissanti, panthaduhanāpi dissanti. 11.3But if the king were to extract more taxes while his realm is thus harried and oppressed, he would not be doing his duty. “Taxes” is bali. He would have had to press his people for the extra funds to hold the sacrifice. 11.3Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā evaṁ sakaṇṭake janapade sauppīḷe balimuddhareyya, akiccakārī assa tena bhavaṁ rājā.

11.4Now the king might think, 11.4Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño evamassa: 11.5“I’ll eradicate this plague of savages by execution or imprisonment or confiscation or condemnation or banishment!” But that’s not the right way to eradicate this plague of savages. “Plague of savages” (dassukhīla) is the only occurrence of Sanskrit dasyu in early Pali. The dasyu were inveterate foes of the Aryans in the Vedic period. Bereft of civilizing rites, scriptures, and observances, they were no children of Manu (Rig Veda 10.22.8). Their wiles (māyā) made them a potent threat (Rig Veda 4.16.9, 8.14.14, 10.73.5). Indra was invoked to ensure their destruction (Rig Veda passim; Atharva Veda 2.14.5, 4.32.3, 20.21.4, 20.37.5, 20.42.2). Legend has it that Agni and Soma first supported the dasyu before being won over by Indra (Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa 1.6.3.13; see also 6.4.2.4). By the time of the Buddha the dasyu have vanished except as a legendary foe of the past. Where the Brahmanical texts advocate the pitiless destruction of the dasyu, the brahmin high priest in the Buddhist text advocates an inclusive policy of social welfare. 11.5“ahametaṁ dassukhīlaṁ vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā samūhanissāmī”ti, na kho panetassa dassukhīlassa evaṁ sammā samugghāto hoti. 11.6Those who remain after the killing will return to harass the king’s realm. The priest knows that the king will respond better to a pragmatic argument than a moral one. 11.6Ye te hatāvasesakā bhavissanti, te pacchā rañño janapadaṁ viheṭhessanti.

11.7Rather, here is a plan, relying on which the plague of savages will be properly uprooted. Effective social policy requires a forward-thinking plan, not just reacting to grievances. 11.7Api ca kho idaṁ saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma evametassa dassukhīlassa sammā samugghāto hoti. 11.8So let the king provide seed and fodder for those in the realm who work in growing crops and raising cattle. The king should spend his own resources to support his citizens in the various occupations. 11.8Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bījabhattaṁ anuppadetu. 11.9Let the king provide funding for those who work in trade. 11.9Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā pābhataṁ anuppadetu. 11.10Let the king guarantee food and wages for those in government service. 11.10Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti rājaporise, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bhattavetanaṁ pakappetu. 11.11Then the people, occupied with their own work, will not harass the realm. Here the priest identifies a fundamental cause of social unrest and disorder. 11.11Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhessanti; 11.12The king’s revenues will be great. The king spends out of pocket, but the economy flourishes, so tax revenues increase even though he has not raised taxes. This is the essence of Keynesian economic theory. 11.12mahā ca rañño rāsiko bhavissati. 11.13When the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, will dwell as if their houses were wide open.’ Khema means a place of safety and sanctuary, where both humans and animals have no fear. 11.13Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharissantī’ti.

11.14The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation. A good leader listens to advice. 11.14‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade ussahiṁsu kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bījabhattaṁ anuppadāsi. 11.15[…]11.15Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito pābhataṁ anuppadāsi. 11.16[…]11.16Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu rājaporise, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bhattavetanaṁ pakappesi. 11.17[…]11.17Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhiṁsu, mahā ca rañño rāsiko ahosi. 11.18[…]11.18Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe vihariṁsu.

11.19Then the king summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: 11.19Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: 11.20‘I have eradicated the plague of savages. And relying on your plan my revenue is now great. 11.20‘samūhato kho me bhoto dassukhīlo, bhoto saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma mahā ca me rāsiko. 11.21Since the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, dwell as if their houses were wide open. 11.21Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharanti. 11.22Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. 11.22Icchāmahaṁ brāhmaṇa mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. 11.23Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’ 11.23Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

12.04.1. The Four Accessories 12.04.1. Catuparikkhāra

12.1‘In that case, let the king announce this throughout the realm to the aristocrat vassals of both town and country; the ministers and councillors of both town and country; the well-to-do brahmins of both town and country; and the well-off householders of both town and country. Here the phrase “of both town and country” qualifies each group. At AN 4.70:1.3, however, “brahmins and householders” and “people of town and country” are separate groups of people. Elsewhere the context does not always decide between these two possibilities. Generally the idiom aims at inclusivity, as opposed to here where the king is consulting the rich and powerful, so I treat them as two separate groups, thus including the common folk. 12.1Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. Ye bhoto rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: 12.2“I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please grant your approval, good fellows; it will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.” 12.2‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.

12.3The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation. 12.3‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: 12.4And all of the people who were thus informed responded by saying: 12.4‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. 12.5‘May the king perform a sacrifice! It is time for a sacrifice, great king.’ 12.5‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. 12.6[…]12.6Ye rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: 12.7[…]12.7‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. 12.8[…]12.8‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. 12.9And so these four consenting factions became accessories to the sacrifice. “Consenting factions” is anumatipakkhā. The king governs with the consent of his people, although only the landowning classes are considered. 12.9Itime cattāro anumatipakkhā tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

13.04.2. The Eight Accessories 13.04.2. Aṭṭhaparikkhāra

13.1King Mahāvijita possessed eight factors. Royal authority is not based just on birth, conquest, ritual, or power, but on quality of character. 13.1Rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato—

13.2He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 13.2ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;

13.3He was attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He had divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. 13.3abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya;

13.4He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses. 13.4aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro;

13.5He was powerful, having an army of four divisions that was obedient and carried out instructions. He’d probably prevail over his enemies just with his reputation. Read sahati (“prevails”) over the several variants. 13.5balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā;

13.6He was faithful, generous, a donor, his door always open. He was a well-spring of support, making merit with ascetics and brahmins, for paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars. 13.6saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti;

13.7He was very learned in diverse fields of learning. He understood the meaning of diverse statements, saying: Showing the importance of comprehension over blind adherence to tradition. 13.7bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa, tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: 13.8‘This is what that statement means; that is what this statement means.’ 13.8‘ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho’ti;

13.9He was astute, competent, and intelligent, able to think issues through as they bear upon the past, future, and present. Meditators focus on the present, but that does not mean they cannot think about the past or future; it just means they are not trapped in useless thoughts. 13.9paṇḍito, viyatto, medhāvī, paṭibalo, atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ.

13.10These are the eight factors that King Mahāvijita possessed. 13.10Rājā mahāvijito imehi aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato. 13.11And so these eight factors also became accessories to the sacrifice. 13.11Iti imānipi aṭṭhaṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

14.04.3. Four More Accessories 14.04.3. Catuparikkhāra

14.1And the brahmin high priest had four factors. These are four of the five qualities that Soṇadaṇḍa identifies as the qualities of a brahmin at DN 4:13.2. Missing is appearance, which is the first factor that Soṇadaṇḍa admits is unnecessary. 14.1Purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato,

14.2He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, of pure descent, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. 14.2ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;

14.3He recited and remembered the hymns, and had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. 14.3ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo;

14.4He was ethical, mature in ethical conduct. 14.4sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato;

14.5He was astute and clever, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle. 14.5paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ.

14.6These are the four factors that the brahmin high priest possessed. 14.6Purohito brāhmaṇo imehi catūhaṅgehi samannāgato. 14.7And so these four factors also became accessories to the sacrifice. 14.7Iti imānipi cattāri aṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.

15.04.4. The Three Modes 15.04.4. Tissovidhā

15.1Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest taught the three modes to the king. 15.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi. 15.2‘Now, though the king wants to perform a great sacrifice, he might have certain regrets, thinking: 15.2Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhukāmassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.3“I shall lose a great fortune,” or Compare the three factors of a donor’s mind-state at AN 6.37:2.4. 15.3‘“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchissatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. 15.4[…]15.4Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.5“I am losing a great fortune,” or 15.5“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. 15.6[…]15.6Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: 15.7“I have lost a great fortune.” But the king should not harbor such regrets.’ 15.7“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigato”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo’ti.

15.8These are the three modes that the brahmin high priest taught to the king before the sacrifice. 15.8Imā kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi.

16.04.5. The Ten Respects 16.04.5. Dasaākāra

16.1Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients in ten respects: What a recipient does with a gift is beyond the donor’s control. 16.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.

16.2‘There will come to the sacrifice those who kill living creatures and those who refrain from killing living creatures. 16.2‘Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ pāṇātipātinopi pāṇātipātā paṭiviratāpi. 16.3As to those who kill living creatures, the outcome of that is theirs alone. 16.3Ye tattha pāṇātipātino, tesaññeva tena. 16.4But as to those who refrain from killing living creatures, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart. PTS edition acknowledges sajjata only as a variant reading, but it is in the commentary, so should be accepted in the text. It is from √sajj (relinquish). 16.4Ye tattha pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

16.5There will come to the sacrifice those who steal … 16.5Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ adinnādāyinopi adinnādānā paṭiviratāpi …pe… 16.6commit sexual misconduct … 16.6kāmesu micchācārinopi kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratāpi … 16.7lie … 16.7musāvādinopi musāvādā paṭiviratāpi … 16.8use backbiting … 16.8pisuṇavācinopi pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … 16.9use harsh speech … 16.9pharusavācinopi pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … 16.10talk nonsense … 16.10samphappalāpinopi samphappalāpā paṭiviratāpi … 16.11are covetous … 16.11abhijjhālunopi anabhijjhālunopi … 16.12have ill will … 16.12byāpannacittāpi abyāpannacittāpi … 16.13have wrong view and those who have right view. 16.13micchādiṭṭhikāpi sammādiṭṭhikāpi …. 16.14As to those who have wrong view, the outcome of that is theirs alone. 16.14Ye tattha micchādiṭṭhikā, tesaññeva tena. 16.15But as to those who have right view, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’ 16.15Ye tattha sammādiṭṭhikā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetū’ti.

16.16These are the ten respects in which the high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients before the sacrifice. 16.16Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.

17.04.6. The Sixteen Respects 17.04.6. Soḷasākāra

17.1Next, while the king was performing the great sacrifice, the brahmin high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind in sixteen respects: 17.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi

17.2‘Now, while the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, 17.2siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.3“King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. Another lesson in leadership: the importance of communication. 17.3‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca; 17.4That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” 17.4atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.5Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.5Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.6For the king did indeed announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. 17.6Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. 17.7Let the king know this as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart. 17.7Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.8While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, 17.8Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.9“King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals; the ministers and councillors; the well-to-do brahmins; and the well-off householders. That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” 17.9‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.10Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.10Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.11For the king did indeed announce it to all these people. Due to abbreviation, the text only mentions householders here, but clearly all are intended. 17.11Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. 17.12Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart. 17.12Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.13While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say 17.13Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.14that he does not possess the eight factors. 17.14‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.15[…]17.15Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.16[…]17.16Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 17.17[…]17.17Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. 17.18[…]17.18Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.19[…]17.19‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati no ca kho abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe… 17.20[…]17.20no ca kho aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro …pe… 17.21[…]17.21no ca kho balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā …pe… 17.22[…]17.22no ca kho saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti …pe… 17.23[…]17.23no ca kho bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa …pe… 17.24[…]17.24no ca kho tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: 17.25[…]17.25“ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho, ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho”ti …pe… 17.26[…]17.26no ca kho paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.27Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.27Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.28For the king does indeed possess the eight factors. 17.28Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ. 17.29Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart. 17.29Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.

17.30While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say 17.30Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.31that the high priest does not possess the four factors. 17.31‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. 17.32[…]17.32No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; 17.33[…]17.33atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.34[…]17.34Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.35[…]17.35Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. 17.36[…]17.36Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. 17.37[…]17.37Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: 17.38[…]17.38‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. 17.39[…]17.39No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe… 17.40[…]17.40no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe… 17.41[…]17.41no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. 17.42Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. 17.42Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. 17.43For the high priest does indeed possess the four factors. 17.43Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. 17.44Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’ 17.44Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetūti.

17.45These are the sixteen respects in which the high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind while he was performing the sacrifice. 17.45Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahi ākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

18.1And brahmin, in that sacrifice no cattle were killed, no goats or sheep were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. 18.1Tasmiṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññe neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. 18.2No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. 18.2Yepissa ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. 18.3Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. A leader gets results through inspiration, not fear. 18.3Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; 18.4They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. 18.4yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu, na taṁ akaṁsu. 18.5The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses. These were regarded as valuable yet harmless products. 18.5Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva so yañño niṭṭhānamagamāsi.

19.1Then the aristocrat vassals, ministers and councillors, well-to-do brahmins, and well-off householders came to the king bringing abundant wealth and said, 19.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ ādāya rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: 19.2‘Sire, this abundant wealth is specially for you alone; may Your Highness accept it!’ The king’s generosity and sincerity brings out the best in the others. 19.2‘idaṁ, deva, pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ devaññeva uddissābhataṁ, taṁ devo paṭiggaṇhātū’ti.

19.3‘There’s enough raised for me through regular taxes. Let this be for you; and here, take even more!’ 19.3‘Alaṁ, bho, mamāpidaṁ pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ dhammikena balinā abhisaṅkhataṁ; 19.4[…]19.4tañca vo hotu, ito ca bhiyyo harathā’ti.

19.5When the king turned them down, they withdrew to one side to think up a plan, 19.5Te raññā paṭikkhittā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: 19.6‘It wouldn’t be proper for us to take this abundant wealth back to our own homes. 19.6‘na kho etaṁ amhākaṁ patirūpaṁ, yaṁ mayaṁ imāni sāpateyyāni punadeva sakāni gharāni paṭihareyyāma. 19.7King Mahāvijita is performing a great sacrifice. Let us make an offering as an auxiliary sacrifice.’ 19.7Rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, handassa mayaṁ anuyāgino homā’ti.

20.1Then the aristocrat vassals of town and country set up gifts to the east of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.1Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, puratthimena yaññavāṭassa khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.2The ministers and councillors of town and country set up gifts to the south of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.2Dakkhiṇena yaññavāṭassa amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.3The well-to-do brahmins of town and country set up gifts to the west of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.3Pacchimena yaññavāṭassa brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. 20.4The well-off householders of town and country set up gifts to the north of the sacrificial enclosure. 20.4Uttarena yaññavāṭassa gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ.

20.5And brahmin, in that sacrifice too no cattle were killed, no goats were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. 20.5Tesupi kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññesu neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. 20.6No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. 20.6Yepi nesaṁ ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. 20.7Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. 20.7Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; 20.8They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. 20.8yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu na taṁ akaṁsu. 20.9The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses. 20.9Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva te yaññā niṭṭhānamagamaṁsu.

20.10And so there were four consenting factions, eight factors possessed by King Mahāvijita, four factors possessed by the high priest, 20.10Iti cattāro ca anumatipakkhā, rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato, purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato; 20.11and three modes. 20.11tisso ca vidhā. 20.12Brahmin, this is called the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.” 20.12Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tividhā yaññasampadā soḷasaparikkhārā”ti.

21.1When he said this, those brahmins made an uproar, Here ends the Buddha’s legendary account of the past. 21.1Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: 21.2“Hooray for such sacrifice! Hooray for the accomplishment of such sacrifice!” 21.2“aho yañño, aho yaññasampadā”ti.

21.3But the brahmin Kūṭadanta sat in silence. The other brahmins are satisfied, but Kūṭadanta senses there is more to it. 21.3Kūṭadanto pana brāhmaṇo tūṇhībhūtova nisinno hoti. 21.4So those brahmins said to him, 21.4Atha kho te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: 21.5“How can you not applaud the ascetic Gotama’s fine words?” 21.5“kasmā pana bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodatī”ti?

21.6“It’s not that I don’t applaud what he said. 21.6“Nāhaṁ, bho, samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodāmi. 21.7If anyone didn’t applaud such fine words, their head would explode! 21.7Muddhāpi tassa vipateyya, yo samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodeyya.

21.8But, gentlemen, it occurs to me that 21.8Api ca me, bho, evaṁ hoti—21.9the ascetic Gotama does not say: 21.9samaṇo gotamo na evamāha: 21.10‘So I have heard’ or ‘It ought to be like this.’ “So I have heard” (evaṁ me sutaṁ) is the standard opening for Buddhist suttas. This tag was used to indicate that the speaker was not present at the events, but “heard” about them. This is in contrast with the phrase “I heard and learned this in the presence” (sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ), which is used when reporting a teaching heard directly from the Buddha, eg. SN 55.52:5.1, SN 22.90:9.1, MN 47:10.7, etc. 21.10‘evaṁ me sutan’ti vā ‘evaṁ arahati bhavitun’ti vā; 21.11Rather, he just says: 21.11api ca samaṇo gotamo: 21.12‘So it was then, this is how it was then.’ 21.12‘evaṁ tadā āsi, itthaṁ tadā āsi’ tveva bhāsati.

21.13It occurs to me that 21.13Tassa mayhaṁ bho evaṁ hoti: 21.14the ascetic Gotama at that time must have been King Mahāvijita, the owner of the sacrifice, or else the brahmin high priest who facilitated the sacrifice for him. 21.14‘addhā samaṇo gotamo tena samayena rājā vā ahosi mahāvijito yaññassāmi purohito vā brāhmaṇo tassa yaññassa yājetā’ti.

21.15Does the worthy Gotama recall having performed such a sacrifice, or having facilitated it, and then, when his body broke up, after death, being reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm?” 21.15Abhijānāti pana bhavaṁ gotamo evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā”ti?

21.16“I do recall that, brahmin. For I myself was the brahmin high priest at that time who facilitated the sacrifice.” This qualifies the story of Mahāvijita as an early canonical Jātaka. There are a small number of such stories in the early suttas, only some of which overlap with the later Jātaka collections, the story of Mahāvijita not being among them. 21.16“Abhijānāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā, ahaṁ tena samayena purohito brāhmaṇo ahosiṁ tassa yaññassa yājetā”ti.

22.05. A Regular Gift as an Propitious Sacrifice. 22.05. Niccadānaanukulayañña

22.1“But Mister Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” Kūṭadanta is hoping for a better return on his investment. Throughout the suttas, we find a strain of what might be called “spiritual economics”. 22.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

22.2“There is, brahmin.” 22.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

22.3“But what is it?” 22.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

22.4“The regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; The anukula (“propitious”) sacrifice is mentioned several times (eg. DN 5:22.4, AN 4.40:2.2). The Pali commentaries interpret it as “in line with (anu-) family (kula)”. But nothing in the contexts connects it with family customs, nor is such a term known in Sanskrit. It seems rather to be a misunderstanding of Sanskrit anukūla, literally “along the riverbank”, and in applied use, “in conformity with”, “favorable to”, as in the favor of the gods. This is the standard reading in Buddhist Sanskrit. Such a sacrifice is characterized, not by family custom, but by harmlessness. Thus anukula means “propitious, favored (by the gods and the Dhamma)”. 22.4“Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; 22.5this sacrifice, brahmin, has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.” 22.5ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

23.1“What is the cause, Mister Gotama, what is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories?” 23.1“Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti?

23.2“Because neither perfected ones nor those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. 23.2“Na kho, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. 23.3Why is that? 23.3Taṁ kissa hetu? 23.4Because beatings and throttlings are seen there. This contradicts the description given above. 23.4Dissanti hettha, brāhmaṇa, daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ na upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.

23.5But the regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; 23.5Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; 23.6perfected ones and those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. 23.6evarūpaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. 23.7Why is that? 23.7Taṁ kissa hetu? 23.8Because no beatings and throttlings are seen there. 23.8Na hettha, brāhmaṇa, dissanti daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.

23.9This is the cause, brahmin, this is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.” 23.9Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti.

24.1“But Mister Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories and those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” 24.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

24.2“There is, brahmin.” 24.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

24.3“But what is it?” 24.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

24.4“When someone gives a dwelling specially for the Saṅgha of the four quarters.” This means that the dwelling could be used by any Saṅgha member, as opposed to being given to a particular monastic or group. The gift of a dwelling is regarded as the best kind of offering to the Saṅgha. 24.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, cātuddisaṁ saṅghaṁ uddissa vihāraṁ karoti, ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

25.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” 25.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

25.2[…]25.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

25.3[…]25.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

25.4“When someone with confident heart goes for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha.” 25.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati; 25.5[…]25.5ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

26.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” 26.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

26.2[…]26.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

26.3[…]26.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

26.4“When someone with a confident heart undertakes the training rules 26.4“Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto sikkhāpadāni samādiyati—26.5to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and beer, wine, and liquor intoxicants.” Thus far the Buddha has described the regular practice of a Buddhist lay person. 26.5pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṁ, adinnādānā veramaṇiṁ, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇiṁ, musāvādā veramaṇiṁ, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiṁ. 26.6[…]26.6Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

27.1“But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?” 27.1“Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

27.2“There is, brahmin. 27.2“Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.

27.3[…]27.3“Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?

27.4“It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. This is the start of the teaching on the Gradual Training, encompassing ethics (sīla), meditation (samādhi), and wisdom (paññā). Only the ethics portion appeared in the Brahmajālasutta, while all three are restated in all the remaining suttas of this chapter, although in truncated form. | It is exceedingly rare for a Buddha to appear. 27.4“idha, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. 27.4.1.2He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. The Buddha realizes the truth by his own understanding, not through divine intervention or other metaphysical means. 27.4.1.2So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. 27.4.1.3He proclaims a teaching that is good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It is good when first heard, when practicing, and when one has realized the fruits. 27.4.1.3So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.

27.4.2.1A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. The word “householder” (gahapati) informally refers to any lay person, but more specifically indicates someone who owns a house, i.e. a person of standing. The renunciate life is not just for slaves or workers wishing to escape their station. 27.4.2.1Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. 27.4.2.2They gain faith in the Realized One 27.4.2.2So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. 27.4.2.3and reflect: 27.4.2.3So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: 27.4.2.4‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. 27.4.2.4‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. 27.4.2.5It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. 27.4.2.5Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. 27.4.2.6Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ 27.4.2.6Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.

27.4.2.7After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. 27.4.2.7So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.

27.4.3.1Once they’ve gone forth, they live restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. They act skillfully by body and speech. They’re purified in livelihood and accomplished in ethical conduct. They guard the sense doors, have mindfulness and situational awareness, and are content. This serves as a table of contents for the teachings to come. | Nowadays, the “monastic code” (pātimokkha) means the list of rules for monks and nuns found in the Vinayapiṭaka. In the early texts, however, it has three main meanings. Sometimes it does refer to the list of rules, as at AN 10.36:1.6. Here it refers to the code of conduct that follows, which is a non-legalistic set of guidelines that preceded the Vinayapiṭaka. At DN 14:3.28.1 it refers to the verses summarizing monastic conduct known as the “Ovāda Pātimokkha”. 27.4.3.1So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo sīlasampanno, indriyesu guttadvāro, satisampajaññena samannāgato, santuṭṭho.

27.4.4.0.15.1. Ethics 27.4.4.0.15.1. Sīla

27.4.4.0.25.1.1. The Shorter Section on Ethics 27.4.4.0.25.1.1. Cūḷasīla

27.4.4.1And how, brahmin, is a mendicant accomplished in ethics? 27.4.4.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti? 27.4.4.2It’s when a mendicant gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. While the precept includes any living creature, if a monastic murders a human being they are immediately and permanently expelled. 27.4.4.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. 27.4.4.3This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.4.3Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.4.4They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving. To steal anything of substantial value is an expulsion offence. 27.4.4.4Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati. 27.4.4.5This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.4.5Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.4.6They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, avoiding the vulgar act of sex. Buddhist monastics are forbidden from any form of sexual activity. To engage in penetrative intercourse is an expulsion offence. 27.4.4.6Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. 27.4.4.7This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.4.7Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.1They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words. While any form of lying is forbidden, if a monastic falsely claims states of enlightenment or deep meditation they are expelled. 27.4.5.1Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. 27.4.5.2This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.5.2Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.3They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. 27.4.5.3Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya; amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā, amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. 27.4.5.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.5.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.5They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, lovely, going to the heart, polite, likable and agreeable to the people. 27.4.5.5Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. 27.4.5.6This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.5.6Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.5.7They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. 27.4.5.7Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. 27.4.5.8This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.5.8Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.6.1They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. 27.4.6.1Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti …pe… 27.4.6.2They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. 27.4.6.2ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. 27.4.6.3They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music . 27.4.6.3Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.4They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. 27.4.6.4Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.5They refrain from high and luxurious beds. To avoid sleeping too much. 27.4.6.5Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.6They refrain from receiving gold and currency, 27.4.6.6Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.7raw grains, 27.4.6.7Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.8raw meat, 27.4.6.8Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.9women and girls, 27.4.6.9Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.10male and female bondservants, 27.4.6.10Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.11goats and sheep, 27.4.6.11Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.12chickens and pigs, 27.4.6.12Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.13elephants, cows, horses, and mares, 27.4.6.13Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.14and fields and land. 27.4.6.14Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.15They refrain from running errands and messages; 27.4.6.15Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.16buying and selling; 27.4.6.16Kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.17falsifying weights, metals, or measures; 27.4.6.17Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.18bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; 27.4.6.18Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.19mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence. 27.4.6.19Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.6.20This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.6.20Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.6.21The shorter section on ethics is finished. 27.4.6.21Cūḷasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.4.7.05.1.2. The Middle Section on Ethics 27.4.7.05.1.2. Majjhimasīla

27.4.7.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in injuring plants and seeds. 27.4.7.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.7.2These include plants propagated from roots, stems, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. They refrain from such injury to plants and seeds. 27.4.7.2Seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ, iti evarūpā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.7.3This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.7.3Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.8.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in storing up goods for their own use. 27.4.8.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ sannidhikāraparibhogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.8.2This includes such things as food, drink, clothes, vehicles, bedding, fragrance, and things of the flesh. 27.4.8.2Seyyathidaṁ—annasannidhiṁ pānasannidhiṁ vatthasannidhiṁ yānasannidhiṁ sayanasannidhiṁ gandhasannidhiṁ āmisasannidhiṁ, 27.4.8.3They refrain from storing up such goods. 27.4.8.3iti vā iti evarūpā sannidhikāraparibhogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.8.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.8.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.9.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in seeing shows. 27.4.9.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ visūkadassanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.9.2This includes such things as dancing, singing, music, performances, and storytelling; clapping, gongs, and kettledrums; beauty pageants; pole-acrobatics and bone-washing displays of the corpse-workers; battles of elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, goats, rams, chickens, and quails; staff-fights, boxing, and wrestling; combat, roll calls of the armed forces, battle-formations, and regimental reviews. 27.4.9.2Seyyathidaṁ—naccaṁ gītaṁ vāditaṁ pekkhaṁ akkhānaṁ pāṇissaraṁ vetāḷaṁ kumbhathūṇaṁ sobhanakaṁ caṇḍālaṁ vaṁsaṁ dhovanaṁ hatthiyuddhaṁ assayuddhaṁ mahiṁsayuddhaṁ usabhayuddhaṁ ajayuddhaṁ meṇḍayuddhaṁ kukkuṭayuddhaṁ vaṭṭakayuddhaṁ daṇḍayuddhaṁ muṭṭhiyuddhaṁ nibbuddhaṁ uyyodhikaṁ balaggaṁ senābyūhaṁ anīkadassanaṁ 27.4.9.3They refrain from such shows. 27.4.9.3iti vā iti evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.9.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.9.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.10.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in gambling that causes negligence. 27.4.10.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.10.2This includes such things as checkers with eight or ten rows, checkers in the air, hopscotch, spillikins, board-games, tip-cat, drawing straws, dice, leaf-flutes, toy plows, somersaults, pinwheels, toy measures, toy carts, toy bows, guessing words from syllables, guessing another’s thoughts, and imitating musical instruments. 27.4.10.2Seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhapadaṁ dasapadaṁ ākāsaṁ parihārapathaṁ santikaṁ khalikaṁ ghaṭikaṁ salākahatthaṁ akkhaṁ paṅgacīraṁ vaṅkakaṁ mokkhacikaṁ ciṅgulikaṁ pattāḷhakaṁ rathakaṁ dhanukaṁ akkharikaṁ manesikaṁ yathāvajjaṁ 27.4.10.3They refrain from such gambling. 27.4.10.3iti vā iti evarūpā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.10.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.10.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.11.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still make use of high and luxurious bedding. 27.4.11.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ uccāsayanamahāsayanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.11.2This includes such things as sofas, couches, woolen covers—shag-piled, colorful, white, embroidered with flowers, quilted, embroidered with animals, double-or single-fringed—and silk covers studded with gems, as well as silken sheets, woven carpets, rugs for elephants, horses, or chariots, antelope hide rugs, and spreads of fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red cushions at both ends. 27.4.11.2Seyyathidaṁ—āsandiṁ pallaṅkaṁ gonakaṁ cittakaṁ paṭikaṁ paṭalikaṁ tūlikaṁ vikatikaṁ uddalomiṁ ekantalomiṁ kaṭṭissaṁ koseyyaṁ kuttakaṁ hatthattharaṁ assattharaṁ rathattharaṁ ajinappaveṇiṁ kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṁ sauttaracchadaṁ ubhatolohitakūpadhānaṁ 27.4.11.3They refrain from such bedding. 27.4.11.3iti vā iti evarūpā uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.11.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.11.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.12.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. 27.4.12.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.12.2This includes such things as applying beauty products by anointing, massaging, bathing, and rubbing; mirrors, ointments, garlands, fragrances, and makeup; face-powder, foundation, bracelets, headbands, fancy walking-sticks or containers, rapiers, parasols, fancy sandals, turbans, jewelry, chowries, and long-fringed white robes. 27.4.12.2Seyyathidaṁ—ucchādanaṁ parimaddanaṁ nhāpanaṁ sambāhanaṁ ādāsaṁ añjanaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ mukhacuṇṇaṁ mukhalepanaṁ hatthabandhaṁ sikhābandhaṁ daṇḍaṁ nāḷikaṁ asiṁ chattaṁ citrupāhanaṁ uṇhīsaṁ maṇiṁ vālabījaniṁ odātāni vatthāni dīghadasāni 27.4.12.3They refrain from such attirement and adornment. 27.4.12.3iti vā iti evarūpā maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.12.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.12.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.13.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in low talk. 27.4.13.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.13.2This includes such topics as talk about kings, bandits, and ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; street talk and well talk; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place. 27.4.13.2Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ 27.4.13.3They refrain from such low talk. 27.4.13.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānakathāya paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.13.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.13.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.14.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in arguments. 27.4.14.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ viggāhikakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.14.2They say such things as: ‘You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!’ 27.4.14.2Seyyathidaṁ—na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi, micchā paṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammā paṭipanno, sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te, pure vacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchā vacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti 27.4.14.3They refrain from such argumentative talk. 27.4.14.3iti vā iti evarūpāya viggāhikakathāya paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.14.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.14.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.15.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in running errands and messages. 27.4.15.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. 27.4.15.2This includes running errands for rulers, ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or princes who say: ‘Go here, go there. Take this, bring that from there.’ 27.4.15.2Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ, rājamahāmattānaṁ, khattiyānaṁ, brāhmaṇānaṁ, gahapatikānaṁ, kumārānaṁ—idha gaccha, amutrāgaccha, idaṁ hara, amutra idaṁ āharā’ti 27.4.15.3They refrain from such errands. 27.4.15.3iti vā iti evarūpā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.15.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.15.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.16.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in fawning, flattery, hinting, and belittling, and using material things to chase after other material things. They refrain from such fraud and flattery. 27.4.16.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te kuhakā ca honti lapakā ca nemittikā ca nippesikā ca lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsitāro ca. Iti evarūpā kuhanalapanā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.16.2This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.16.2Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.16.3The middle section on ethics is finished. 27.4.16.3Majjhimasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.4.17.05.1.3. The Long Section on Ethics 27.4.17.05.1.3. Mahāsīla

27.4.17.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.17.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.17.2This includes such fields as augury, omenology, divining portents, interpreting dreams, divining features of men and women, divining holes in cloth gnawed by mice, fire offerings, ladle offerings, offerings of husks, rice powder, rice, ghee, or oil; offerings from the mouth, blood sacrifices, limb-reading; geomancy for building sites, fields, and cemeteries; exorcisms, earth magic, snake charming, poisons; the lore of the scorpion, the rat, the bird, and the crow; prophesying life span, chanting for protection, and divining omens from wild animals. 27.4.17.2Seyyathidaṁ—aṅgaṁ nimittaṁ uppātaṁ supinaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ mūsikacchinnaṁ aggihomaṁ dabbihomaṁ thusahomaṁ kaṇahomaṁ taṇḍulahomaṁ sappihomaṁ telahomaṁ mukhahomaṁ lohitahomaṁ aṅgavijjā vatthuvijjā khattavijjā sivavijjā bhūtavijjā bhūrivijjā ahivijjā visavijjā vicchikavijjā mūsikavijjā sakuṇavijjā vāyasavijjā pakkajjhānaṁ saraparittāṇaṁ migacakkaṁ 27.4.17.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.17.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.17.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.17.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.18.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.18.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.18.2This includes reading the marks of gems, cloth, clubs, swords, spears, arrows, bows, weapons, women, men, boys, girls, male and female bondservants, elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, cows, goats, rams, chickens, quails, monitor lizards, rabbits, tortoises, or deer. 27.4.18.2Seyyathidaṁ—maṇilakkhaṇaṁ vatthalakkhaṇaṁ daṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ satthalakkhaṇaṁ asilakkhaṇaṁ usulakkhaṇaṁ dhanulakkhaṇaṁ āvudhalakkhaṇaṁ itthilakkhaṇaṁ purisalakkhaṇaṁ kumāralakkhaṇaṁ kumārilakkhaṇaṁ dāsalakkhaṇaṁ dāsilakkhaṇaṁ hatthilakkhaṇaṁ assalakkhaṇaṁ mahiṁsalakkhaṇaṁ usabhalakkhaṇaṁ golakkhaṇaṁ ajalakkhaṇaṁ meṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ kukkuṭalakkhaṇaṁ vaṭṭakalakkhaṇaṁ godhālakkhaṇaṁ kaṇṇikalakkhaṇaṁ kacchapalakkhaṇaṁ migalakkhaṇaṁ 27.4.18.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.18.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.18.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.18.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.19.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.19.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.19.2This includes making predictions that the king will march forth or march back; or that our king will attack and the enemy king will retreat, or vice versa; or that our king will triumph and the enemy king will be defeated, or vice versa; and so there will be victory for one and defeat for the other. 27.4.19.2Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ niyyānaṁ bhavissati, raññaṁ aniyyānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, iti imassa jayo bhavissati, imassa parājayo bhavissati 27.4.19.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.19.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.19.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.19.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.20.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.20.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.20.2This includes making predictions that there will be an eclipse of the moon, or sun, or stars; that the sun, moon, and stars will be in conjunction or in opposition; that there will be a meteor shower, a fiery horizon, an earthquake, or thunder in the heavens; that there will be a rising, a setting, a darkening, a brightening of the moon, sun, and stars. And it also includes making predictions about the results of all such phenomena. 27.4.20.2Seyyathidaṁ—candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissati, nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, ukkāpāto bhavissati, disāḍāho bhavissati, bhūmicālo bhavissati, devadudrabhi bhavissati, candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko candaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko sūriyaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissati, evaṁvipāko disāḍāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko bhūmicālo bhavissati, evaṁvipāko devadudrabhi bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati 27.4.20.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.20.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.20.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.20.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.21.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.21.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.21.2This includes predicting whether there will be plenty of rain or drought; plenty to eat or famine; an abundant harvest or a bad harvest; security or peril; sickness or health. It also includes such occupations as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, poetry, and cosmology. 27.4.21.2Seyyathidaṁ—suvuṭṭhikā bhavissati, dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissati, subhikkhaṁ bhavissati, dubbhikkhaṁ bhavissati, khemaṁ bhavissati, bhayaṁ bhavissati, rogo bhavissati, ārogyaṁ bhavissati, muddā, gaṇanā, saṅkhānaṁ, kāveyyaṁ, lokāyataṁ 27.4.21.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.21.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.21.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.21.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.22.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.22.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.22.2This includes making arrangements for giving and taking in marriage; for engagement and divorce; and for scattering rice inwards or outwards at the wedding ceremony. It also includes casting spells for good or bad luck, treating impacted fetuses, binding the tongue, or locking the jaws; charms for the hands and ears; questioning a mirror, a girl, or a god as an oracle; worshiping the sun, worshiping the Great One, breathing fire, and invoking Siri, the goddess of luck. 27.4.22.2Seyyathidaṁ—āvāhanaṁ vivāhanaṁ saṁvaraṇaṁ vivaraṇaṁ saṅkiraṇaṁ vikiraṇaṁ subhagakaraṇaṁ dubbhagakaraṇaṁ viruddhagabbhakaraṇaṁ jivhānibandhanaṁ hanusaṁhananaṁ hatthābhijappanaṁ hanujappanaṁ kaṇṇajappanaṁ ādāsapañhaṁ kumārikapañhaṁ devapañhaṁ ādiccupaṭṭhānaṁ mahatupaṭṭhānaṁ abbhujjalanaṁ sirivhāyanaṁ 27.4.22.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.22.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.22.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.22.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.23.1There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. 27.4.23.1Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. 27.4.23.2This includes rites for propitiation, for granting wishes, for ghosts, for the earth, for rain, for property settlement, and for preparing and consecrating house sites, and rites involving sipping water and bathing, and oblations. It also includes administering emetics, purgatives, expectorants, and phlegmagogues; administering ear-oils, eye restoratives, nasal medicine, ointments, and counter-ointments; surgery with needle and scalpel, treating children, prescribing root medicines, and herbal bandages. 27.4.23.2Seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ bhūtakammaṁ bhūrikammaṁ vassakammaṁ vossakammaṁ vatthukammaṁ vatthuparikammaṁ ācamanaṁ nhāpanaṁ juhanaṁ vamanaṁ virecanaṁ uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ sīsavirecanaṁ kaṇṇatelaṁ nettatappanaṁ natthukammaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ sālākiyaṁ sallakattiyaṁ dārakatikicchā, mūlabhesajjānaṁ anuppadānaṁ, osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho 27.4.23.3They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. 27.4.23.3iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. 27.4.23.4This pertains to their ethics. 27.4.23.4Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.

27.4.24.1A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. 27.4.24.1Sa kho so, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. 27.4.24.2It’s like a king who has defeated his enemies. He sees no danger from his foes in any quarter. 27.4.24.2Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto nihatapaccāmitto na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ paccatthikato; 27.4.24.3In the same way, a mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. 27.4.24.3evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. 27.4.24.4When they have this entire spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves. This is the first step in the Buddha’s answer to Ajātasattu. This is the sense of happiness and well-being that you have when you know you have done nothing wrong for which anyone might blame you. It is the psychological foundation for meditation. 27.4.24.4So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. 27.5That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. 27.5Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.

27.5.1.6The longer section on ethics is finished. 27.5.1.6Mahāsīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

27.5.2.0.15.2. Immersion 27.5.2.0.15.2. Samādhi

27.5.2.0.25.2.1. Sense Restraint 27.5.2.0.25.2.1. Indriyasaṁvara

27.5.2.1And how does a mendicant guard the sense doors? Here begins the series of practices that build on moral fundamentals to lay the groundwork for meditation. 27.5.2.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti? 27.5.2.2When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. 27.5.2.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. 27.5.2.3If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. It is not that one cannot see things, but that, mindful of its effect, one avoids unnecessary stimulation. | “Covetousness and bitterness” (abhijjhā domanassā) are the strong forms of desire and aversion caused by lack of restraint. 27.5.2.3Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. 27.5.2.4When they hear a sound with their ears … 27.5.2.4Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… 27.5.2.5When they smell an odor with their nose … 27.5.2.5ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… 27.5.2.6When they taste a flavor with their tongue … 27.5.2.6jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… 27.5.2.7When they feel a touch with their body … 27.5.2.7kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… 27.5.2.8When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. 27.5.2.8manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. 27.5.2.9If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. 27.5.2.9Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. 27.5.2.10When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves. Their happiness deepens, as they see that not only their actions but also their mind is becoming free of anything unwholesome. 27.5.2.10So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. 27.5.2.11That’s how a mendicant guards the sense doors. 27.5.2.11Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti.

27.5.3.05.2.2. Mindfulness and Situational Awareness 27.5.3.05.2.2. Satisampajañña

27.5.3.1And how does a mendicant have mindfulness and situational awareness? Situational awareness is a psychological term popularized in the 1990s. It has to do with the perception of environmental phenomena and the comprehension of their meaning, which is very close to the sense of the Pali term sampajañña. 27.5.3.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti? 27.5.3.2It’s when a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. These acts describe the daily life of a mendicant: going into the village for alms, at which time there are many distracting sights. Then they return, eat their meal, and spend their day in meditation. 27.5.3.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. 27.5.3.3That’s how a mendicant has mindfulness and situational awareness. 27.5.3.3Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti.

27.5.4.05.2.3. Contentment 27.5.4.05.2.3. Santosa

27.5.4.1And how is a mendicant content? 27.5.4.1Kathañca, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti? 27.5.4.2It’s when a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. A Buddhist monk has three robes: a lower robe (sabong or sarong), an upper robe, and an outer cloak. 27.5.4.2Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. 27.5.4.3They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. 27.5.4.3Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti, sapattabhārova ḍeti; 27.5.4.4In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. 27.5.4.4evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. 27.5.4.5That’s how a mendicant is content. 27.5.4.5Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti.

27.5.5.05.2.4. Giving Up the Hindrances 27.5.5.05.2.4. Nīvaraṇappahāna

27.5.5.1When they have this entire spectrum of noble ethics, this noble sense restraint, this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, and this noble contentment, These are the prerequisite conditions for embarking on deep meditation. 27.5.5.1So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, 27.5.5.2they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. 27.5.5.2vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. 27.5.5.3After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and establish mindfulness in their presence. For parimukha (“in their presence”) we find pratimukha in Sanskrit, which can mean “presence” or the reflection of the face. Late canonical Pali explains parimukha as “the tip of the nose or the reflection of the face (mukhanimitta)”. Parimukha in Sanskrit is rare, but it appears in Pāṇini 4.4.29, which the commentary illustrates with the example of a servant “in the presence” of their master (cp. SN 47.8). So it seems the sense is “before the face” or more generally “in the presence”. | To “establish mindfulness” (satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā) is literally to “do satipaṭṭhāna”. 27.5.5.3So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.

27.5.6.1Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Covetousness (abhijjha) has been curbed by sense restraint, and now is fully abandoned. 27.5.6.1So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.2Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Likewise ill will (byāpādapadosa), which was called domanassa in the formula for sense restraint. 27.5.6.2Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.3Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. “Mindfulness and situational awareness” has a prominent role in abandoning dullness. 27.5.6.3Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī, sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.4Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind peaceful inside, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Restlessness hankers for the future and is countered by contentment. Remorse digs up the past and is countered by ethical purity. 27.5.6.4Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. 27.5.6.5Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt. The meditator set out on their path after gaining faith in the Buddha. 27.5.6.5Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati, akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.

27.5.7.1Suppose a man who has gotten into debt were to apply himself to work, The happiness of meditation is hard to understand without practicing, so the Buddha gives a series of five similes to illustrate in terms Ajātasattu would understand. 27.5.7.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojeyya. 27.5.7.2and his efforts proved successful. 27.5.7.2Tassa te kammantā samijjheyyuṁ. 27.5.7.3He would pay off the original loan and have enough left over to support his partner. 27.5.7.3So yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ kareyya, siyā cassa uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāya. 27.5.7.4Thinking about this, 27.5.7.4Tassa evamassa: 27.5.7.5[…]27.5.7.5‘ahaṁ kho pubbe iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojesiṁ. 27.5.7.6[…]27.5.7.6Tassa me te kammantā samijjhiṁsu. 27.5.7.7[…]27.5.7.7Sohaṁ yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ akāsiṁ, atthi ca me uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. 27.5.7.8he’d be filled with joy and happiness. 27.5.7.8So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.8.1Suppose there was a person who was sick, suffering, gravely ill. They’d lose their appetite and get physically weak. 27.5.8.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso ābādhiko assa dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; bhattañcassa nacchādeyya, na cassa kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.2But after some time they’d recover from that illness, and regain their appetite and their strength. 27.5.8.2So aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā mucceyya; bhattaṁ cassa chādeyya, siyā cassa kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.3Thinking about this, 27.5.8.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.8.4[…]27.5.8.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe ābādhiko ahosiṁ dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; 27.5.8.5[…]27.5.8.5bhattañca me nacchādesi, na ca me āsi kāye balamattā. 27.5.8.6[…]27.5.8.6Somhi etarahi tamhā ābādhā mutto; 27.5.8.7[…]27.5.8.7bhattañca me chādeti, atthi ca me kāye balamattā’ti. 27.5.8.8they’d be filled with joy and happiness. 27.5.8.8So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.9.1Suppose a person was imprisoned in a jail. 27.5.9.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso bandhanāgāre baddho assa. 27.5.9.2But after some time they were released from jail, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. 27.5.9.2So aparena samayena tamhā bandhanāgārā mucceyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. 27.5.9.3Thinking about this, 27.5.9.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.9.4[…]27.5.9.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe bandhanāgāre baddho ahosiṁ, somhi etarahi tamhā bandhanāgārā mutto sotthinā abbhayena. 27.5.9.5[…]27.5.9.5Natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. 27.5.9.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness. 27.5.9.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.10.1Suppose a person was a bondservant. They would not be their own master, but indentured to another, unable to go where they wish. 27.5.10.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso dāso assa anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.2But after some time they’d be freed from servitude. They would be their own master, not indentured to another, a freeman able to go where they wish. 27.5.10.2So aparena samayena tamhā dāsabyā mucceyya attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.3Thinking about this, 27.5.10.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.10.4[…]27.5.10.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe dāso ahosiṁ anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. 27.5.10.5[…]27.5.10.5Somhi etarahi tamhā dāsabyā mutto attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo’ti. 27.5.10.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness. 27.5.10.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.11.1Suppose there was a person with wealth and property who was traveling along a desert road, which was perilous, with nothing to eat. 27.5.11.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjeyya dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.2But after some time they crossed over the desert safely, arriving within a village, a sanctuary free of peril. 27.5.11.2So aparena samayena taṁ kantāraṁ nitthareyya sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anupāpuṇeyya khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.3Thinking about this, 27.5.11.3Tassa evamassa: 27.5.11.4[…]27.5.11.4‘ahaṁ kho pubbe sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjiṁ dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. 27.5.11.5[…]27.5.11.5Somhi etarahi taṁ kantāraṁ nitthiṇṇo sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anuppatto khemaṁ appaṭibhayan’ti. 27.5.11.6they’d be filled with joy and happiness. 27.5.11.6So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.

27.5.12.1In the same way, as long as these five hindrances are not given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards them thus as a debt, a disease, a prison, slavery, and a desert crossing. The five hindrances remain a pillar of meditation teaching. The root sense means to “obstruct” but also to “obscure, darken, veil”. 27.5.12.1Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu yathā iṇaṁ yathā rogaṁ yathā bandhanāgāraṁ yathā dāsabyaṁ yathā kantāraddhānamaggaṁ, evaṁ ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīne attani samanupassati.

27.5.12.2But when these five hindrances are given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards this as freedom from debt, good health, release from prison, emancipation, and a place of sanctuary at last. Each simile illustrates not the happiness of acquisition, but of letting go. 27.5.12.2Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, yathā āṇaṇyaṁ yathā ārogyaṁ yathā bandhanāmokkhaṁ yathā bhujissaṁ yathā khemantabhūmiṁ; 27.5.12.3[…]27.5.12.3evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassati.

27.5.12.4Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. The Buddha did not emphasize technical details of technique, but the emotional wholeness and joy that leads to deep meditation. 27.5.12.4Tassime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.

27.5.13.05.2.5. First Absorption 27.5.13.05.2.5. Paṭhamajhāna

27.6Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Jhāna is a state of “elevated consciousness” (adhicitta), so all the terms have an elevated sense. | The plural form indicates that “sensual pleasures” includes sense experience, which the meditator can turn away from since they no longer have any desire for it. | The “unskillful qualities” are the five hindrances. | The “rapture and bliss born of seclusion” is the happiness of abandoning the hindrances and freedom from sense impingement. | “Placing the mind and keeping it connected” (vitakka, vicāra) uses terms that mean “thought” in coarse consciousness, but which in “elevated consciousness” refer to the subtle function of applying the mind to the meditation. 27.6So vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.6.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. As a meditator proceeds, their subjective experience of the “body” evolves from tactile sense impressions (phoṭṭhabba), to the interior mental experience of bliss and light (manomayakāya), to the direct personal realization of highest truth (MN 70:23.2: kāyena ceva paramasaccaṁ sacchikaroti). 27.6.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.6.2.1It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out. The kneading is the “placing the mind and keeping it connected”, the water is bliss, while the lack of leaking speaks to the contained interiority of the experience. | Here as elsewhere, water is used as a metaphor for the mind in absorption. Compare Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad 4.3.32: “He becomes like water, one, the seer without duality; this is the world of Brahmā.” 27.6.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya, sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena, na ca paggharaṇī; 27.6.2.2In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. 27.6.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.7This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.7ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.7.1.05.2.6. Second Absorption 27.7.1.05.2.6. Dutiyajhāna

27.8Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without applying the mind and keeping it connected. Each jhāna begins as the least refined aspect of the previous jhāna ends. This is not consciously directed, but describes the natural process of settling. The meditator is now fully confident and no longer needs to apply their mind: it is simply still and fully unified. 27.8Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.8.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. 27.8.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.8.2.1It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. The simile emphasizes the water as bliss, while the lack of inflow expresses containment and unification. 27.8.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. 27.8.2.2But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water. The water welling up is the rapture, which is the uplifting emotional response to the experience of bliss. 27.8.2.2Atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.

27.8.2.3In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. 27.8.2.3Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.8.2.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.8.2.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.8.3.05.2.7. Third Absorption 27.8.3.05.2.7. Tatiyajhāna

27.9Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, personally experiencing the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ The emotional response to bliss matures from the subtle thrill of rapture to the poise of equanimity. Mindfulness is present in all states of deep meditation, but with equanimity it becomes prominent. 27.9Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.9.1.2They drench, steep, fill, and spread their body with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. 27.9.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.9.2.1It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water. The meditator is utterly immersed in stillness and bliss. 27.9.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; 27.9.2.2In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. 27.9.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.9.2.3This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.9.2.3ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.9.3.05.2.8. Fourth Absorption 27.9.3.05.2.8. Catutthajhāna

27.10Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. The emotional poise of equanimity leads to the feeling of pleasure settling into the more subtle neutral feeling. Pain and sadness have been abandoned long before, but are emphasized here as they are subtle counterpart of pleasure. 27.10Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. 27.10.1.2They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. The equanimity of the fourth jhāna is not dullness and indifference, but a brilliant and radiant awareness. 27.10.1.2So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti.

27.10.2.1It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth. The white cloth is the purity and brightness of equanimity. The commentary explains this as a person who has just got out of a bath and sits perfectly dry and content. 27.10.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa; 27.10.2.2In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. 27.10.2.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. 27.11This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.11ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.11.1.0.15.3. The Eight Knowledges 27.11.1.0.15.3. Aṭṭhañāṇa

27.11.1.0.25.3.1. Knowledge and Vision 27.11.1.0.25.3.1. Vipassanāñāṇa

27.12When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. Of the eight kinds of knowledge and vision, only the last is considered indispensable. The fourth jhāna is the ideal basis for developing higher knowledges, although elsewhere the canon shows that even the first jhāna can be a basis for liberating insight. Without jhāna, however, the eightfold path is incomplete and liberating insight is impossible. | The verb abhininnāmeti (“extend”) indicates that the meditator comes out of full immersion like a tortoise sticking out its limbs (SN 35.240:1.7). 27.12So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.12.1.2They understand: 27.12.1.2So evaṁ pajānāti: 27.12.1.3‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. This is the “coarse” (olārika) body. Note that its generation by mother and father contradicts the doctrine of Ajita Kesakambala. The obvious impermanence of the body invites the tempting but fallacious notion that the mind or soul is permanent, which is dispelled by deeper insight. 27.12.1.3‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; 27.12.1.4And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’ This distinction should not be mistaken for mind-body dualism. These are not fundamental substances but experiences of a meditator. 27.12.1.4idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti.

27.12.2.1Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. 27.12.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. 27.12.2.2And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. Strung gems were loved in India from the time in the Harappan civilization, millennia before the Buddha. 27.12.2.2Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. 27.12.2.3And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and check it: 27.12.2.3Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: 27.12.2.4‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. 27.12.2.4‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno; 27.12.2.5And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’ 27.12.2.5tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.

27.12.2.6In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. This form of “knowledge and vision” is rarely mentioned, being found only here, at DN 10:2.21.3, and at MN 77:29.2. The next realization, the “mind-made body” is also only found in these three suttas. | The Mahāsaṅgīti edition adds the spurious title vipassanāñāṇa (“insight knowledge”) to this section. This term does not appear anywhere in the Pali canon. 27.12.2.6Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.12.2.7[…]27.12.2.7So evaṁ pajānāti: 27.12.2.8[…]27.12.2.8‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; 27.12.2.9[…]27.12.2.9idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti. 27.13This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.1.05.3.2. Mind-Made Body 27.13.1.05.3.2. Manomayiddhiñāṇa

27.13.1.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. The “mind-made body” is the interior mental representation of the physical body. In ordinary consciousness it is proprioception, which here is enhanced by the power of meditation. The higher powers in Buddhism are regarded as extensions and evolutions of aspects of ordinary experience, not as metaphysical realities separate from the world of mundane experience. 27.13.1.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.1.2From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. This is similar to the experience of the “astral body” described by modern spiritualists. Note that it is still “physical” (rūpī) even though it is mind-made. This is the subtle (sukhuma) body, which is an energetic experience of physical properties by the mind. 27.13.1.2So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ.

27.13.2.1Suppose a person was to draw a reed out from its sheath. 27.13.2.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso muñjamhā īsikaṁ pavāheyya. 27.13.2.2They’d think: 27.13.2.2Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.3‘This is the reed, this is the sheath. The reed and the sheath are different things. The reed has been drawn out from the sheath.’ 27.13.2.3‘ayaṁ muñjo, ayaṁ īsikā, añño muñjo, aññā īsikā, muñjamhā tveva īsikā pavāḷhā’ti. 27.13.2.4Or suppose a person was to draw a sword out from its scabbard. 27.13.2.4Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso asiṁ kosiyā pavāheyya. 27.13.2.5They’d think: 27.13.2.5Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.6‘This is the sword, this is the scabbard. The sword and the scabbard are different things. The sword has been drawn out from the scabbard.’ 27.13.2.6‘ayaṁ asi, ayaṁ kosi, añño asi, aññā kosi, kosiyā tveva asi pavāḷho’ti. 27.13.2.7Or suppose a person was to draw a snake out from its slough. 27.13.2.7Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya. 27.13.2.8They’d think: 27.13.2.8Tassa evamassa: 27.13.2.9‘This is the snake, this is the slough. The snake and the slough are different things. The snake has been drawn out from the slough.’ 27.13.2.9‘ayaṁ ahi, ayaṁ karaṇḍo. Añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo, karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’ti.

27.13.2.10In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. 27.13.2.10Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.2.11From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. 27.13.2.11So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. 27.13.2.12This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.2.12ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.3.05.3.3. Psychic Powers 27.13.3.05.3.3. Iddhividhañāṇa

27.13.3.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. Here begin the “six direct knowledges” (chaḷabhiññā), which are found commonly throughout the early texts. | “Psychic powers” (iddhi) were much cultivated in the Buddha’s day, but the means to acquire them varied: devotion to a god, brutal penances, or magic rituals. The Buddha taught that the mind developed in samādhi was capable of things that are normally incomprehensible. 27.13.3.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.3.2They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity. Only a few of these are attested as events in the early texts. The most common is the ability to “materialize and dematerialize”, exhibited by the Buddha (AN 8.30:2.1), some disciples (MN 37:6.1), and deities (MN 67:8.1). The Pali is āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ, literally “manifest state, hidden state”. Also found in Chāndogya Upaniṣad 7.26.1. 27.13.3.2So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.

27.13.4.1Suppose a deft potter or their apprentice had some well-prepared clay. They could produce any kind of pot that they like. These similes hark back to the descriptions of the purified mind as pliable and workable. 27.13.4.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, dakkho kumbhakāro vā kumbhakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatāya mattikāya yaṁ yadeva bhājanavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. 27.13.4.2Or suppose a deft ivory-carver or their apprentice had some well-prepared ivory. They could produce any kind of ivory item that they like. 27.13.4.2Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, dakkho dantakāro vā dantakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ dantasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva dantavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. 27.13.4.3Or suppose a deft goldsmith or their apprentice had some well-prepared gold. They could produce any kind of gold item that they like. This simile is extended in detail at AN 3.101. 27.13.4.3Seyyathā vā pana, brāhmaṇa, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ suvaṇṇasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva suvaṇṇavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya.

27.13.4.4In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. 27.13.4.4Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.4.5[…]27.13.4.5So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti. 27.13.4.6This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.4.6ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.5.05.3.4. Clairaudience 27.13.5.05.3.4. Dibbasotañāṇa

27.13.5.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. “Clairaudience” is a literal rendition of dibbasota. The root sense of dibba is to “shine” like the bright sky or a divine being. The senses of clarity and divinity are both present. 27.13.5.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.5.2With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. The Buddha occasionally used this ability for teaching, as at MN 75:6.1. 27.13.5.2So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca.

27.13.6.1Suppose there was a person traveling along the road. They’d hear the sound of drums, clay drums, horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms. They’d think: ‘That’s the sound of drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of clay drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms.’ The simile emphasizes the clarity and distinctness of the sounds. Compare AN 4.114: bheripaṇavasaṅkhatiṇavaninnādasaddānaṁ. 27.13.6.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno. So suṇeyya bherisaddampi mudiṅgasaddampi saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘bherisaddo’ itipi, ‘mudiṅgasaddo’ itipi, ‘saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddo’ itipi.

27.13.6.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. 27.13.6.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.6.3With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. 27.13.6.3So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. 27.13.6.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.6.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.7.05.3.5. encompassing the minds of Others 27.13.7.05.3.5. Cetopariyañāṇa

27.13.7.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. Note that the Indic idiom is not the “reading” of minds, which suggests hearing the words spoken in inner dialogue. While this is exhibited by the Buddha (eg. AN 8.30:2.1), the main emphasis is on the comprehension of the overall state of mind. 27.13.7.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.7.2They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. 27.13.7.2So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti—27.13.7.3They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, 27.13.7.3sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.4and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’. 27.13.7.4vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.5They understand mind with hate … 27.13.7.5sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.6mind without hate … 27.13.7.6vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.7mind with delusion … 27.13.7.7samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.8mind without delusion … 27.13.7.8vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.9constricted mind … 27.13.7.9saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.10scattered mind … 27.13.7.10vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.11expansive mind … 27.13.7.11mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.12unexpansive mind … 27.13.7.12amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.13mind that is not supreme … 27.13.7.13sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.14mind that is supreme … 27.13.7.14anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.15immersed mind … 27.13.7.15samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.16unimmersed mind … 27.13.7.16asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.17freed mind … 27.13.7.17vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, 27.13.7.18They understand unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’. 27.13.7.18avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.

27.13.8.1Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and they check their own reflection in a clean bright mirror or a clear bowl of water. If they had a spot they’d know ‘I have a spot,’ and if they had no spots they’d know ‘I have no spots.’ Again the simile emphasizes how clear and direct the experience is. Without deep meditation, we have some intuitive sense for the minds of others, but it is far from clear. 27.13.8.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanajātiko ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodāte acche vā udakapatte sakaṁ mukhanimittaṁ paccavekkhamāno sakaṇikaṁ vā ‘sakaṇikan’ti jāneyya, akaṇikaṁ vā ‘akaṇikan’ti jāneyya; 27.13.8.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. 27.13.8.2evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.8.3They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. 27.13.8.3So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti—27.13.8.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.8.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.9.05.3.6. Recollection of Past Lives 27.13.9.05.3.6. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa

27.13.9.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. Here begins the “three knowledges” (tevijjā), a subset of the six direct knowledges. The first two of these play an important role in deepening understanding of the nature of suffering in saṁsāra. While they are not necessary for those whose wisdom is keen, they are helpful. 27.13.9.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.9.2They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Empowered by the fourth jhāna, memory breaks through the veil of birth and death, revealing the vast expanse of time and dispelling the illusion that there is any place of eternal rest or sanctuary in the cycle of transmigration. The knowledge of these events is not hazy or murky, but clear and precise, illuminated by the brilliance of purified consciousness. 27.13.9.2So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.

27.13.10.1Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’ The word for “past life” is pubbenivāsa, literally “former home”, and the imagery of houses is found in the second of the three knowledges as well. Recollection of past lives is as fresh and clear as the memory of a recent journey. 27.13.10.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya. So tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatra evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrāpi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti.

27.13.10.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. 27.13.10.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.10.3[…]27.13.10.3So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. 27.13.10.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.10.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.11.05.3.7. Clairvoyance 27.13.11.05.3.7. Dibbacakkhuñāṇa

27.13.11.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. 27.13.11.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.11.2With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Here knowledge extends to the rebirths of others as well as oneself. Even more significant, it brings in the understanding of cause and effect; why rebirth happens the way it does. Such knowledge, however, is not infallible, as the Buddha warns in DN 1:2.5.3 and MN 136. The experience is one thing; the inferences drawn from it are another. One should draw conclusions only tentatively, after long experience. | “Clairvoyance” renders dibbacakkhu (“celestial eye”), for which see Chāndogya Upaniṣad 8.12.5, “the mind is (the self’s) celestial eye” (mano’sya daivaṁ cakṣuḥ). 27.13.11.2So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.

27.13.12.1Suppose there was a stilt longhouse at the central square. A person with clear eyes standing there might see humans entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square. They’d think: ‘These are people entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square.’ This simile is also found at DN 10:2.33.1. The Majjhima employs a slightly different simile (MN 39:20.3, MN 77:35.2, MN 130:2.1). | Pāsāda is often translated as “palace” or “mansion”, but in early Pali it meant a “stilt longhouse”. As here, it is an elevated place from which one can observe the street below. 27.13.12.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, majjhe siṅghāṭake pāsādo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi rathikāyapi vīthiṁ sañcarante majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnepi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ete manussā gehaṁ pavisanti, ete nikkhamanti, ete rathikāya vīthiṁ sañcaranti, ete majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā’ti.

27.13.12.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. 27.13.12.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.12.3[…]27.13.12.3So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate; yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. 27.13.12.4This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.13.12.4ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…

27.13.13.05.3.8. Ending of Defilements 27.13.13.05.3.8. Āsavakkhayañāṇa

27.13.13.1When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. This is the experience of awakening that is the true goal of the Buddhist path. The defilements—properties of the mind that create suffering—have been curbed by the practice of ethics and suppressed by the power of jhāna. Here they are eliminated forever. 27.13.13.1So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.13.13.2They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. These are the four noble truths, which form the main content of the Buddha’s first sermon. They are the overarching principle into which all other teachings fall. The initial realization of the four noble truths indicates the first stage of awakening, stream-entry. 27.13.13.2So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. 27.13.13.3They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. The application of the four noble truths to defilements indicates that this is the final stage of awakening, perfection (or “arahantship”, arahatta). | Many translators use “defilement” to render kilesa, but since kilesa appears only rarely in the early texts, I use “defilement” for āsava. Both terms refer to a stain, corruption, or pollution in the mind. 27.13.13.3Ime āsavāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. 27.13.13.4Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. Bhavāsava is the defilement that craves to continue life in a new birth. 27.13.13.4Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, 27.13.13.5When they’re freed, they know they’re freed. This is a reflective awareness of the fact of awakening. The meditator reviews their mind and sees that it is free from all forces that lead to suffering. 27.13.13.5vimuttasmiṁ ‘vimuttam’iti ñāṇaṁ hoti, 27.14They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ This is a standard declaration of full awakening in the suttas, said both of the Buddha and of any arahant (“perfected one”). Each of the four phrases illustrates a cardinal principle of awakening. (1) Further transmigration through rebirths has come to an end due to the exhaustion (khīṇa) of that which propels rebirth, namely deeds motivated by craving. (2) The eightfold path has been developed fully in all respects. (3) All functions relating to the four noble truths have been completed, namely: understanding suffering, letting go craving, witnessing extinguishment, and developing the path. (4) Extinguishment is final, with no falling back to this or any other state of existence. | For “state of existence” (literally “thusness”, itthatta), see DN 15:21.4. 27.14‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.

27.14.1.1Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, and pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, and pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’ Once again the pool of water represents the mind, but now the meditator is not immersed in the experience, but looks back and reviews it objectively. 27.14.1.1Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakathalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti.

27.14.1.2In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. 27.14.1.2Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. 27.15This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. 27.15Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca. 27.16And, brahmin, there is no other accomplishment of sacrifice which is better and finer than this.” The entire path may be described as a “sacrifice”. 27.16Imāya ca, brāhmaṇa, yaññasampadāya aññā yaññasampadā uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthī”ti.

28.06. Kūṭadanta Declares Himself a Lay Follower 28.06. Kūṭadantaupāsakattapaṭivedanā

28.1When he had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, 28.1Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 28.2“Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! 28.2“abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. 28.3As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. 28.3Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. 28.4I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. 28.4Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. 28.5From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life. 28.5Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.

28.6And these bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats, and rams—seven hundred of each—I release them, I grant them life! Let them eat green grass and drink cool water, and may a cool breeze blow upon them!” Releasing animals remains a Buddhist practice today. 28.6Esāhaṁ, bho gotama, satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni muñcāmi, jīvitaṁ demi, haritāni ceva tiṇāni khādantu, sītāni ca pānīyāni pivantu, sīto ca nesaṁ vāto upavāyatū”ti.

29.07. The Realization of the Fruit of Stream-Entry 29.07. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyā

29.1Then the Buddha taught Kūṭadanta step by step, with 29.1Atha kho bhagavā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—29.2a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He explained the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. 29.2dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ; kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. 29.3And when he knew that Kūṭadanta’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he explained the special teaching of the Buddhas: 29.3Yadā bhagavā aññāsi kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi—29.4suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. 29.4dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. 29.5Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, 29.5Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; 29.6in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the brahmin Kūṭadanta: 29.6evameva kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa tasmiññeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: 29.7“Everything that has a beginning has an end.” 29.7“yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.

30.1Then Kūṭadanta saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha, 30.1Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: 30.2“Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” 30.2“adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. 30.3The Buddha consented with silence. 30.3Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

30.4Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Kūṭadanta got up from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving. 30.4Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. 30.5And when the night had passed Kūṭadanta had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own sacrificial enclosure. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, 30.5Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake yaññavāṭe paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: 30.6“It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.” 30.6“kālo, bho gotama; niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

30.7Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the sacrificial enclosure of Kūṭadanta together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat on the seat spread out. 30.7Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa yaññavāṭo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

30.8Then Kūṭadanta served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. 30.8Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. 30.9When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Kūṭadanta took a low seat and sat to one side. 30.9Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. 30.10Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk, after which he got up from his seat and left. 30.10Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti.

30.11[…]30.11Kūṭadantasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.